JP7421526B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine having multiple gaming states.

Conventionally, gaming machines having multiple gaming states have been known (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, a time saving state and a normal state are defined as gaming states. Furthermore, the probability of winning the 15-round jackpot is higher when the normal state is set than when the time saving state is set, which is advantageous to the player. Then, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the normal state is set. This makes it possible to set a gaming state advantageous to the player in accordance with the execution of the RAM clear process.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-50490

However, with conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the gameplay may be reduced.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, a gaming state in which the probability of winning the 15th round jackpot is increased is only set in accordance with the execution of the RAM clearing process, and there is a possibility that the gaming performance may be reduced.
An object of the present invention is to improve gameplay.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first invention includes a game determining means for executing game determination, a first state, a second state, and each of the first state and the second state. A third state that is advantageous to the player in comparison, and a gaming state control means that can set any one of a plurality of gaming states including a third state that is advantageous to the player, and when the initialization process is executed, When the first state is set and a specific result is determined by the game determination, the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry hole is not executed, and the types of the specific result are a first specific result and a second specific result. , and if the first specific result is determined by the game determination performed during the setting of the first state, the third state is set, and the game determination performed during the setting of the third state is When the first state is set as the number of game determinations reaches a first predetermined number of times, and the second specific result is determined by the game determination executed during the setting of the first state; , the second state is set, and the number of game determinations executed during the setting of the second state reaches a second predetermined number, the first state is set, and the second state is set. If the first specific result is determined by the game determination executed during setting, the third state is not set, and a common The game is progressed by firing a game ball into an area, and the game is progressed by firing a game ball into different areas during setting of the second state and during setting of the third state, and It is characterized in that the second predetermined number of times is greater than the predetermined number of times.
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the invention, when the first specific result is determined by the game determination performed during the setting of the first state, the third state is set which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the first specific result is determined by the game determination executed during the setting of the second state, the third state that is advantageous to the player is not set. As a result, during the setting of the first state, it is possible to shift to the third state upon winning a specific result in which the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry hole is not executed, which is advantageous to the player compared to the second state. becomes.
In particular, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the first state is set in response to execution of the initialization process. As a result, in accordance with the execution of the initialization process, a gaming state (specifically, the first state) that can be shifted to the third state upon winning a specific result in which the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entrance is not performed. It becomes possible to set.
As described above, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, it is possible to improve the gaming performance.
Here, the game determination corresponds to the start determination described later. The game determining means corresponds to the main control board 200 (steps S11-7, S11-8, S11-11), which will be described later. The first state corresponds to a normal state, which will be described later. The second state corresponds to time saving state 1, which will be described later. The third state corresponds to time saving state 2, which will be described later. The main control board 200 (steps S43-2, S13-14), which will be described later, corresponds to the game state control means. The initialization process corresponds to the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30), which will be described later. As the first identification result, "time-saving symbol 1", which will be described later, corresponds. A special electric accessory 55a to be described later corresponds to the variable ball entrance. The common area may be the entire area of the left path or a partial area of the left path (for example, a guide path that guides a game ball launched in response to a rotational operation of the firing handle 6, which will be described later) to the game area 30. (a predetermined area located on the left side of the exit of the firing path, a predetermined area located on the left side of the first starting port 51 described later, etc.).

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the gameplay.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing the front of the game board and schematically showing the parts especially necessary for explanation. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the winning probability of various lotteries. It is a diagram showing winning types of normal symbol lottery. It is a diagram showing winning types of special symbol lottery. It is a diagram showing the transition of gaming states. It is a flowchart which shows CPU initialization processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main loop processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating evacuation processing when power is cut off. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing. 3 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating setting-related processing. 5 is a flowchart showing switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 starting ball detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 starting ball detection processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart showing special game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the number cut management process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure stop processing. It is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening pre-opening process. It is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening control process. It is a flowchart showing the first big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening end wait process. It is a flowchart showing the second grand prize opening pre-opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big prize opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening end wait process. It is a flowchart which shows special electric role opening/closing switching processing. It is a flowchart showing normal game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal electric role opening/closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal electric accessory release control processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal electric accessory closure effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening end wait processing. 3 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing. It is a figure showing the winning probability of various lotteries concerning a modification. It is a figure showing the winning type of special symbol lottery concerning a modification.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, a gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, a front frame unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the front frame unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thereby, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Further, the front frame unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). The outer frame of the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2.
The front frame unit 4 is formed in the shape of a rectangular door. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a disposed approximately in the center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a saucer unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a saucer. It has a firing handle 6 disposed on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed into a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is made of a transparent or semi-transparent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. A sound cutout part 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed is provided at each upper corner of the decorative part 4b. Each sound extraction part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output from the speaker 22 passes. Further, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 includes a tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and a performance button 5b and a rotary selector 5c arranged on the front side of the tray 5a.
The performance button 5b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is arranged so as to protrude upward from the saucer unit 5. The performance button 5b can be pressed down (pressed downward) by the player. A first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the saucer unit 5 to detect a press operation of the production button 5b. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the production control board 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the production button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is arranged to surround the production button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated (rotated around a cylindrical shaft) by the player. A second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the saucer unit 5 to detect a rotational operation of the rotary selector 5c. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the production control board 300 every time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5, a lending operation section 7 is arranged. The rental operation section 7 includes a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit (not shown) that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining power of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit is displayed on the power display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the saucer 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls that have been paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining card count of valuable media is inserted into the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, examples of the prepaid cart include a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like.
The firing handle 6 can be rotated by the player. A firing volume 410 (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the firing handle 6 to detect the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated. The firing volume 410 outputs a detection signal according to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be explained.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board and schematically showing the parts particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is placed on the back side of the front frame unit 4. The player can visually check the game board 11 (game area 30), which will be described later, through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is configured between the back side of the transparent plate 4a and the front side of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various production devices (main image display device 31, sub (an image display device 32, a movable body unit, etc.).
The set plate is formed into a box shape with an open front side. An opening consisting of a through hole is provided approximately at the center of the back plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is made of resin and is formed into a flat plate shape. Approximately at the center of the game board 11, an opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
A game area 30 is formed around the opening on the front side of the game board 11, in which game balls shot out in response to the rotational operation of the firing handle 6 flow down. In the gaming area 30, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right side path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths for the game balls to flow down. There is.
Further, in the game area 30 of the game board 11, a board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is provided. The panel lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a that can display various effect images (moving images and still images).
The display screen 31a displays three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which the first effect pattern z1 (not shown) is displayed, and a second effect pattern z2 (not shown). It is possible to configure one second effect pattern display area a4 (not shown).
The first performance pattern z1 includes identification information (designs) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to execute a variable display and a stop display of the first performance symbol z1.
In this embodiment, each first effect symbol z1 is configured to include any one of identification information among identification information "1" to "7". That is, seven types of first performance symbols z1 (first performance symbols z1 displaying each identification information of "1" to "7") are defined as the first performance symbol z1 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. There is. In addition, seven types of first performance symbols z1 (first performance symbols z1 that display each identification information of "1" to "7") are defined as the first performance symbols z1 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery. There is.
The second effect pattern z2 is composed of color bars. In the second performance symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second performance symbol z2.

The variable display of the production symbols z1 and z2 means that the first production symbol z1 fluctuates in each of the first production symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second production symbol z2 fluctuates in the second production symbol display area a4. It is displayed as follows.
In this embodiment, during the variable display of the performance symbols z1 and z2, the type of the first performance symbol z1 displayed at the lottery result display position is changed in each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, or the type of the first performance symbol z1 displayed at the lottery result display position is changed. The production symbol z1 is displayed in a moving state (moving/scrolling state), and the type of the second production symbol z2 displayed is changed in the second production symbol display area a4 (specifically, The colors represented by the color bar are changed sequentially).
The stop display of the production symbols z1 and z2 means that the first production symbol z1 stops at the lottery result display position in each of the first production symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second production symbol z1 stops in the lottery result display position of each of the first production symbol display areas a1 to a3. The effect pattern z2 is displayed to stop.

In this embodiment, while the performance symbols z1 and z2 are being stopped and displayed, the first performance symbol z1 of one type is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second performance symbol z1 is stopped. In the symbol display area a4, one type of second performance symbol z2 is stopped (specifically, the color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a special symbol is created by a combination of the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second performance symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure pending symbol display areas b1 to b3 (not shown) in which pending symbols h (not shown) are displayed.
In the pending symbol display area b1, a pending symbol h corresponding to the game information being displayed (fluctuating display and stop display of special symbols) is displayed. In the pending symbol display area b2, a pending symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 1 starting information whose starting determination (notification display) to be described later is pending is displayed. In the pending symbol display area b3, a pending symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 2 starting information whose starting determination (notification display) is pending is displayed.

The sub-image display device 32 is arranged at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub-image display device 32 is constituted by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including the origin position (see FIG. 2) and a presentation position (not shown) below the origin position. .
The sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the origin position is disposed above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 placed (displaced) at the presentation position is placed in front of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31, and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided on the left side path. The first starting port 51 is a ball entry port (so-called "belly button") that opens upward, and allows game balls to enter at all times. The first starting port 51 allows entry of game balls flowing down the left path (incapable of entry of game balls flowing down the right path).
Inside the first starting port 51, a special figure 1 starting port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 1 starting port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the first starting port 51 (entering the game ball into the first starting port 51). Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special symbol 1 starting port switch 101.

On the left side of the first starting opening 51 on the left side route, there are provided an upper left winning opening 57a, a middle left winning opening 57b, and a lower left winning opening 57c. Each of the other winning holes 57a to 57c is a ball entrance opening that opens upward, and allows game balls to enter at all times. Each of the other prize winning ports 57a to 57c is configured such that game balls flowing down the left path can enter (game balls flowing down the right path cannot enter).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning hole switch 106 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the other winning holes 57a to 57c (game ball entering the other winning holes 57a to 57c). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of prize balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning port switch 106.

A big prize opening 55 is provided at the most upstream side of the right path. The grand prize opening 55 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 55, and an open state that makes it possible (easily) to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 55. A special electric accessory (special electric accessory) 55a that can be displaced is provided.
The special electric accessory 55a is opened and closed by a special electric accessory solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). Normally, the special electric accessory 55a is in a closed state, making it impossible (difficult) for game balls to enter the big prize opening 55, but a small winning game state or a jackpot game state may occur. In this case, the special electric accessory 55a is opened and the game ball can be entered (easily). The grand prize opening 55 allows the entry of game balls flowing down the right path (it is not possible to enter the game balls flowing down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged inside the grand prize opening 55. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the big winning hole 55 (entering the game ball into the big winning hole 55). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of prize balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103.
In addition, the big winning hole 55 has a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a game ball that enters the big winning hole 55 is placed in either the V area or the discharge area. Allocating means (not shown) for allocating to the areas is provided.
A V-area switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is provided in the V-area. The V area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V area (passage of the game ball through the V area). The main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, in response to the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110.
The sorting means is displaced into a V-passing state in which the game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 55 are distributed to the V area, and a non-V passing state in which the gaming balls that have entered the grand prize opening 55 are distributed to the discharge area. It is now possible to do so.
That is, when the distribution means is displaced to the V passing state, the game ball that enters the big prize opening 55 is distributed to the V area. This makes it impossible for the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 55 to pass through the discharge area.
On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, the game balls that have entered the big prize opening 55 are distributed to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 55 to pass through the V area.
The distribution means is displaced by a V-area solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
A game ball that enters the grand prize opening 55 is first detected by the count switch 103, then sorted by the sorting means to either the V area or the discharge area, and after passing through the area. , is discharged to the discharge channel. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V area are detected by the V area switch 110.

A second starting port 52 is provided on the downstream side of the big winning port 55 on the right path. The second starting port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting port 52, and a closed state that makes it possible (easily) to enter a game ball into the second starting port 52. A normal electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a that can be displaced to an open state and an open state is provided.
The normal electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). In the second starting port 52, normally the electric accessory 52a is in a closed state and it is impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting port 52, but when a game state occurs when a normal figure hits At this time, the normal electric accessory 52a is opened, allowing the game ball to enter. The second starting port 52 allows entry of game balls flowing down the right path (incapable of entry of game balls flowing down the left path).
A special figure 2 starting port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed within the second starting port 52. The special figure 2 starting port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the second starting port 52 (entering the game ball into the second starting port 52). Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special symbol 2 starting port switch 102.

A starting gate 41 is provided downstream of the second starting port 52 in the right path. The starting gate 41 is formed so that game balls can pass through it at all times. The starting gate 41 is configured such that game balls flowing down the right path can pass through it (game balls flowing down the left path cannot pass through it).
The starting gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3). Gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through starting gate 41 (passing of starting gate 41 by a game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.

On the downstream side of the starting gate 41 in the right path, a right winning opening 56 is provided. The other right winning hole 56 is a ball entrance opening that opens upward, and allows game balls to enter at all times. The other right winning hole 56 is configured such that game balls flowing down the right path can enter there (game balls flowing down the left path cannot enter).
In the other right winning hole 56, a right winning hole switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The right winning hole switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the right other winning hole 56 (the game ball entering the right other winning hole 56). . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of prize balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning port switch 105.

At the most downstream side of the gaming area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (won) any of the winning ports 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that all the game balls launched into the game area 30 (all the game balls ejected from the game area 30) pass through the ejection path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 enters any of the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c, or passes through the out hole 58, and the game ball enters the game area 30. and flows into the discharge channel.
Specifically, the game ball that entered each winning hole 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c was detected by the switch 101, 102, 103, 105, 106, 110 arranged in the winning hole. Afterwards, it is guided to the exit channel. Moreover, the game balls discharged from the out port 58 are guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all the game balls ejected from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Further, in the gaming area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the gaming balls to each winning opening 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is provided on the game board 11. The main display device 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays information regarding games.
The main display device 60 includes a special pattern 1 display device, a special pattern 2 display device, a general pattern display device, a special pattern 1 holding display device, a special pattern 2 holding display device, a general pattern pattern holding display device, and a round pattern display device. It is configured to include a display device, a right-handed display device, a variable probability display device, and a time saving display device. In addition, in this embodiment, the probability variable display device is not used.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute a special figure 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute a special figure 2 display device, LEDs 17 and 18 constitute a regular figure display device, and LED19 ~ The LED 23 constitutes a round display device, the LED 24 constitutes a right-handed display device, the LEDs 25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 reservation display device, and the LEDs 27 and 28 constitute a special figure 2 reservation display device. However, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal figure reservation display device, the LED 31 constitutes a probability change display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of variable display and stop display of a first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed using the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of variable display and stop display of a second special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed using the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device and the display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2 start variable display. The time when the variable display ends, the time when the static display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the statically displayed symbol are associated with each other.
In addition, the display of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 display device and the display of performance symbols a1 and a3 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area A3 start variable display. The time, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stop display symbol are associated with each other.
Then, if the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (jackpot symbol), or the second special symbol (stopped symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device becomes a specific symbol (jackpot symbol). When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (jackpot symbol), a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player occurs.
In addition, when the second special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display device becomes a specific symbol (small winning symbol), the small winning gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is changed. be caused.
The ordinary symbol display device is capable of fluctuating and statically displaying ordinary symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. Then, in the ordinary symbol display device, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed using the stopped and displayed ordinary symbols.
Here, the display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display device and the display of the production symbols a4 and a5 in the ordinary symbol mini symbol display area A4 and the ordinary symbol fourth symbol display area A5 are related to the timing at which the variable display starts, the fluctuation The time when the display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stop display symbol are associated with each other.
Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (a common symbol per symbol), a common symbol per game state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player is generated.

The number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is suspended (the number of special symbols 1 pending) is displayed on the special symbol 1 pending display device.
The special figure 2 pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 2 pending number).
The number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is suspended (the number of regular symbols pending) is displayed on the regular symbol reservation display device.
The round display device displays the number of round games executed during the jackpot gaming state (type of jackpot gaming state).
The right-handed display device displays the path (left-hand path or right-side path) in which the game ball should be hit.
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, a variable probability display device is not used.
The current game state (the time saving state (time saving state 1 or time saving state 2 described later) is being executed or stopped) is displayed on the time saving display device.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or more movable units (not shown). In this embodiment, one or more movable units are arranged in the front frame unit 4, and one or more movable units are arranged in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is disposed on the front of the decoration part 4b, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set plate. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter referred to as "performance space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation in the performance space.
Each movable unit includes a presentation member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The presentation member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the presentation member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a presentation position. The presentation member is driven (displaced) by the motor 23.

The position detection sensor 26 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the presentation member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section that receives the light projected from the light projecting section. Then, the position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the production control board 300 in response to the reception (detection) of the light projected from the light projecting section by the light receiving section. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 26 stops outputting the detection signal to the production control board 300 when the light receiving section does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light projecting section.
Moreover, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the presentation member. Then, when the presentation member is placed at the initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the position detection sensor 26 to block light from entering the light receiving part. As a result, when the production member is placed at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the production control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the effect member is not placed at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 26 to the effect control board 300.
Thereby, the effect control board 300 is able to detect whether or not the effect member is placed at the initial position based on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a detection sensor that detects various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, the detection sensors include a glass frame open sensor 107 (see FIG. 3), an inner frame open sensor 108 (see FIG. 3), a vibration detection sensor 113 (see FIG. 3), and a radio wave detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 3). , a magnetic detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 3), and the like are provided.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame open sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame open sensor 108 detects opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame open sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11. The vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of radio waves.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is disposed in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Further, on the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. The magnetic detection sensor 115 provided in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (power) to the main control board 200, the production control board 300, the payout control board 400, each control board 200, 300, 400, etc. It includes a plurality of control boards, such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 310, and a sub-connection board 320.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are mutually independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 is housed in an individual board case (such as a main board case 250 described later).
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be explained.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It is configured to include a driver 240, source drivers 250a, 250b, and the like.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. The memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230.
The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including an unused area.
The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area contains a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests specified by gaming machine regulations, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). code) and are stored. The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests specified by gaming machine regulations, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition to the used area m1 and the unused area m2, the ROM 220 is also provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as the program title and version. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, in the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. This clarifies the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The usage area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the usage area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during the execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. Note that the used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a setting value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, and a normal game related area 2. It is composed of:
Setting values are stored in the setting value area. A gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. A backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. The error related area stores information regarding errors. In the normal game related area 1, subcommand pointers and the like are stored. The normal game related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results, game status, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 is an area for storing game information acquired in response to input of detection signals from each of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101, the special drawing 2 starting port switch 102, and the gate switch 104. (gaming information storage area to be described later), a special figure 1 display symbol counter, a special figure 2 display symbol counter, a regular symbol display symbol counter, etc.

The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
During the execution of the program stored in the unused area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the gaming machine regulations or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the work area is It is used as an area to temporarily store various data. On the other hand, the stack area is used to store programs stored in the unused area m2 (programs for executing processing related to tests specified by gaming machine regulations, or programs for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area. The performance display related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Further, in the RAM 230, an unused area M3 of a predetermined byte (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

In this embodiment, in the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the unused area M2.
On the other hand, the data stored in the unused area M2 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. There is.
In addition, in processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to a test specified by gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the used area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, by processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to a test specified by gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the used area It is prohibited that the data stored in M1 be rewritten (changed).
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203.
The random number generation circuit 203 includes a first loop counter that generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to include a 3-loop counter and a 4th loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. To generate a winning random number for a normal symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within a range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter keeps the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, from 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once by dividing the clock frequency by 32). Within the range), a reach group random number is generated by updating by 1. In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (input port 0 to input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame open sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. Detection signals etc. from are input.
A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, etc. are input to the input port 1.
The input port 2 receives a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a detection signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114. Detection signals and the like are input.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special map 1 starting port switch 101, a detection signal from the special chart 2 starting port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc. Ru.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor is set.
Specifically, when the detection signal from the switch/sensor is input (high level), "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, and the reception storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor is set to "1". "0" is set when no detection signal is input (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output ports 0 to 4).
Output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60. The data signal output from output port 0 is then input to the source driver 250a.
Output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling lighting of main display device 60 and performance display device 206. The common signal output from output port 1 is input to sink driver 240.
Output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 receives a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the special electric accessory solenoid 65, a control signal for controlling the V region solenoid 66, etc. Output.
Output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of performance display device 206. The data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Further, the main control board 200 includes a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) to the production control board 300 from the command output port 1, and transmits a control command (payout command) to the payout control board 400 from the command output port 2. do.
Command output port 1 and command output port 2 each include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown). have.
The transmission data register outputs the input control command to the FIFO buffer based on subcommand transmission processing (step S2-4), which will be described later.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and is capable of storing a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register, and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the production control board 300 or payout control board 400 as serial data.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). Note that the performance display device 206 is disposed on the back side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the gaming machine states (hereinafter referred to as "gaming machine states") include a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, and a RAM abnormal state. and a backup abnormal state are defined. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes depending on the gaming machine state that is occurring.

The performance display device 206 includes four (four-digit) display sections (not shown). Each display section is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display section is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 become the first digit display section, LED41 to LED48 become the second digit display section, LED49 to LED56 become the third digit display section, and LED57 to LED64 become the third digit display section. is the fourth digit displayed.

While the game-enabled state is occurring, it is possible to proceed with the game. Then, while the playable state is occurring, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
In the present embodiment, during the occurrence of the playable state, the first base ratio and the second base ratio are displayed on the performance display device 206 at predetermined intervals (in the present embodiment, 5.0 [s]). , are displayed alternately.
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top two digits of the four-digit display section display information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio). The lower two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value can be changed. Then, while the setting change state is occurring, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, ""r","n." in the second highest digit, "-" in the third highest digit), and the display section of the lowest one digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting value can be confirmed. Then, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, ""r", the second highest digit is "n.", the third highest digit is not displayed), and the display section of the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area. Ru.

While the game is in a stopped state (abnormal setting state, abnormal RAM state, and abnormal backup state), it is impossible to proceed with the game. Then, while the game is in a stopped state, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the top three digits of the four-digit display section display information indicating that the gaming stop state is occurring (specifically, ""E","r." in the top two digits, no display in the top three digits), and the display of the bottom one digit indicates the error that has occurred (setting abnormality, RAM abnormality, or backup abnormality). A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation section that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operating section is pressed down.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 includes an operation section provided with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from an OFF state to an ON state. The setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation section is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of the common signal to each display device 60, 206 according to the common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in accordance with the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0.
The source driver 250b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in accordance with the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4.
As a result, the source driver 250a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display device 60.
Further, the source driver 250b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 206.

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In test signal output processing (step S4-24), which will be described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (jackpot game state, time-saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.). Then, the generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. The test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, a detection signal from the special drawing 1 starting opening switch 101, a detection signal from the special drawing 2 starting opening switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the count switch 103, a right prize winning A detection signal from the opening switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and are sent to the test computer via the test signal output circuit. Input to the interface board.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the drive of each solenoid (normal electric accessory solenoid 64, special electric accessory solenoid 65, V area solenoid 66, etc.) output from the output port 3 are transmitted to each solenoid. The signals are input to the solenoids 64, 65, and 66, and are also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be explained.
The payout control board 400 controls the firing of game balls to the game area 30 and the payout of the game balls.
The payout control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU, ROM, RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
Further, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball firing operation by the game ball firing device 430 based on the detection signal input from the firing volume 410. Specifically, the game ball firing operation by the game ball firing device 430 is controlled so that the game ball is fired into the gaming area 30 with a strength corresponding to the detection signal input from the firing volume 410.

(Configuration of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the production control board 300 will be explained.
The performance control board 300 controls the performance.
The performance control board 300 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, VDP, sound processor, illumination controller, motor controller, and the like.
Based on control commands received from the main control board 200, the effect control board 300 displays effect images on various image display devices 31 and 32, turns on various lamps 20 and 21, outputs sounds from various speakers 22, and controls various movements. It controls the driving of the motor 23 that drives the body unit.

The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores programs related to the progress of the performance, data necessary for the progress of the performance, and the like.
The RAM of the production control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 determines the performance content to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets a performance program (performance control table) corresponding to the determined performance content.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signals) according to the effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to various image display devices 31 and 32.
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signal) according to a production program (production control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated sound control data to a digital audio power amplifier (not shown). Output. Then, the digital audio power amplifier generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and transmits the generated control signals to the various speakers 22 via the sub-connection board 320. Output for.
The illumination controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signals) according to the effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated lamp control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320. Output against.
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signals) according to the effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320. and output it.

The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the production control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver sends an excitation signal (drive current) output.
The lamp control data output from the production control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system forming the board lamp 21 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300.
The sub-connection board 320 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the production control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver sends an excitation signal (drive current) output.
The lamp control data output from the production control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system forming the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300.

(About gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states are defined as gaming machine states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state). .
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine status flag area. The gaming machine status flag area contains six gaming machine statuses (specifically, game ready status, setting change status, setting confirmation status, abnormal setting status, abnormal RAM status, and abnormal backup status) as gaming machine status flags. ), a value corresponding to any one of the gaming machine states is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which it is possible to proceed with the game.
While the game-enabled state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted. This allows the games (normal games and special games) to proceed.
Furthermore, while the game-enabled state is occurring, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, information regarding the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The “setting change state” is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state is generated when the setting change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 207 is input. When the signal is input, the setting change condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state occurs. be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Further, while the setting change state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Further, while the setting change state is occurring, by pressing down the RAM clear switch 207, it becomes possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area. Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, a game enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the setting value stored in the setting value area is determined.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The setting confirmation state occurs when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 207 is input. The setting confirmation condition is met when no signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, the setting confirmation state occurs. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Further, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to check the setting values stored in the setting value area. Furthermore, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Note that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, a game ready state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range while the game enabled state is occurring.
While the setting abnormality is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Furthermore, while a setting abnormality is occurring, an error code designating the occurrence of a setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from an abnormal setting state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to bring about a setting change state.

The "RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
While the RAM abnormal state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Furthermore, while the RAM abnormality is occurring, an error code specifying the occurrence of the RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, a backup flag abnormality or a checksum abnormality) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
While the backup abnormal state is occurring, execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, games (specifically, normal games and special games) are stopped.
Furthermore, while a backup abnormality is occurring, an error code designating the occurrence of a backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to bring about a setting change state.

(About setting values)
Next, setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "set value" is information that specifies the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In this embodiment, values from "0" to "5" are defined as the set value.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. In the set value area, one of the values "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. Then, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is determined according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) changes depending on the value set in the set value area.
The probability of winning the special symbol lottery (probability of winning the "jackpot") corresponding to each setting value is determined in descending order of probability of winning, with the probability of winning corresponding to the setting value = "5", the probability of winning corresponding to the setting value = "4", etc. Corresponding winning probability, winning probability corresponding to setting value = "3", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1", corresponding to setting value = "0" The probability of winning is (high probability of winning → low probability of winning).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting values stored in the setting value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the setting value is changed by an administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the settings are A modified state is raised.
While the setting change state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, a game enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the setting value stored in the setting value area is determined.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the game-enabled state is occurring. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined gaming state is occurring (specifically, while the special figure low probability state is occurring and the time saving control is stopped).
Then, while the playable state is occurring, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls fired into the game area 30 and the number of game balls fired into the predetermined ball entry ports (in this embodiment, the starting ports 51, 52 and other winning ports 56, 57a to 57c). This information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out in response to the ball entering the ball. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of prize balls paid out) to the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit out).
In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined section (period) is calculated. Then, as the predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 60,000 [balls]) of out balls are detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts in response to the end of the previous section, and ends in response to the number of out pitches detected during the current section reaching a predetermined number (60,000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.
Note that a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio every predetermined time.
"Number of out pitches" refers to the number of out pitches. “Out ball” refers to a game ball ejected from the game area 30. Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
Note that the game ball ejected from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball ejected from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be regarded as an out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the starting holes 51, 52 and other winning holes 56, 57a to 57c.

(About gaming status)
Next, the gaming state defined by the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time saving control 1 and time saving control 2 as auxiliary controls that are advantageous to the player. In the following explanation, the gaming state while time saving control 1 is stopped and time saving control 2 is stopped is referred to as a "normal state". Furthermore, the gaming state during which time saving control 1 is being executed is defined as "time saving state 1". Furthermore, the gaming state during which time saving control 2 is being executed is defined as "time saving state 2".
During the occurrence of the normal state (excluding the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state described later), information specifying the left-hand path as the path to hit the game ball is displayed on the right-hand display device. Then, while the normal state is occurring, the game progresses by firing the game ball toward the left path.
While the time saving state 1 is occurring, information specifying the left-hand path as the path to hit the game ball is displayed on the right-hand display device. Then, while the time saving state 1 is occurring, the game progresses by firing the game ball toward the left path.
While the time saving state 2 is occurring, the right-handed display device displays information specifying the right-hand path as the path to hit the game ball. Then, while the time saving state 2 is occurring, the game progresses by firing the game ball toward the right path.
In particular, during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, compared to the occurrence of the normal state and the occurrence of the time saving state 1, if the "normal symbol hit" is won by the normal symbol lottery, the normal electric win There is a high probability that a "long opening pattern", which will be described later, will be selected as the opening pattern for the object 52a. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a "normal pattern hit" is won in the normal symbol lottery during the occurrence of the normal state and during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, "Long The probability that "open pattern" is selected is the same.
Further, in this embodiment, the base ratio is configured to be the same or substantially the same during the occurrence of the normal state and during the occurrence of the time saving state 1. On the other hand, the base ratio is configured to be higher when the time saving state 2 is occurring than when the normal state/time saving state 1 is occurring.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery does not change depending on the gaming state. In other words, the probability of winning a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery is determined when time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is being executed (while time saving state 1 or time saving state 2 is occurring) and when time saving control (time saving control) is being executed (while time saving state 1 or time saving state 2 is occurring). 1 and during stoppage of time saving control 2) (while the normal state is occurring). In addition, regarding the probability of winning a "normal symbol" in the regular symbol lottery, it is determined whether the time saving control 1 is being executed (while the time saving state 1 is occurring) and the time saving control 2 is being being executed (the time saving state 2 is occurring). They are the same.
Further, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small hit" by special symbol lottery does not change depending on the gaming state.

(About various lotteries)
Next, various types of lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities of various lotteries. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the winning types of the normal symbol lottery. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the winning types of the special symbol lottery.
In addition, FIG. 4(a) shows the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, FIG. 4(b) shows the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery, and FIG. 4(c) shows the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery. It shows the probability. Further, FIG. 5 shows the winning type (the type of "symbol per common pattern") that is selected when a "symbol per common pattern" is won in the normal pattern lottery. Furthermore, FIG. 6(a) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot symbol") that is selected when a "jackpot" is won by the first special symbol lottery, and FIG. 6(b) shows the first special symbol lottery. The winning type (type of "time saving symbol") that is selected when "time saving" is won in the lottery is shown, and FIG. 6(c) is selected when "jackpot" is won in the second special symbol lottery. Figure 6(d) shows the winning type (type of "big winning symbol") that is selected when a "small winning" is won in the second special symbol lottery. It shows.

(Normal design lottery)
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through the starting gate 41.
In this embodiment, only the "normal symbol hit" is defined as the result of the normal symbol lottery. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which "normal pattern hit" and "miss" are defined as the result of the normal pattern lottery.
As shown in FIG. 4(a), in the regular symbol lottery (determining whether a regular symbol wins or loses), the probability of winning "a common symbol" is 1/1. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery does not change depending on the gaming state. In addition, the probability of winning a "normal symbol" by the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state is higher than the probability of winning "normal symbol winning" by the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state (time saving state 1 or time saving state 2). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the "Public drawing" is higher.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning type (type of "symbol per common pattern") selected when a "symbol per common pattern" is won in the normal symbol lottery is "symbol per common pattern 1". and "design 2 per ordinary design" are defined.
In the regular symbol lottery (common symbol stop design determination), if you win "regular symbol per", the probability of winning "regular symbol 1" is 65000/65536, and the probability of winning "regular symbol 2" is 65000/65536. The probability is 536/65536.
When the "symbol 1 per ordinary symbol" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol 1 per ordinary symbol" is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device. On the other hand, if the "symbol 2 per ordinary symbol" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol 2 per ordinary symbol" is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device.

When the "Public pattern winning"("Public pattern winning pattern 1" or "Public pattern winning pattern 2") is won, a winning pattern gaming state is generated. In the normal figure winning game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 52 (easily).
In this embodiment, a "short opening pattern" and a "long opening pattern" are defined as the types of opening patterns (opening mode/opening/closing mode) of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal pattern game state. ing.
The "short opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening/closing mode) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern game state. In the "short release pattern", compared to the "long release pattern", the time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state is shorter. Specifically, in the "short opening pattern", the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a for each time is set to 0.1 [s]. Ru.
The "long open pattern" is an open pattern (open mode/open/close mode) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern game state. In the "long open pattern", compared to the "short open pattern", the time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state is longer. Specifically, in the "long opening pattern", the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a for each time is set to 5.0 [s]. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 5, if the "symbol 1 per normal pattern" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the normal electric accessory 52a during the normal state is generated. ``Short release pattern'' is selected and set as the release pattern. On the other hand, in the case where the "popular symbol per symbol 2" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the common symbol gaming state, The "short release pattern" is selected and set. As a result, when a "normal symbol" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the "short opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.
On the other hand, if the "symbol 1 per ordinary symbol" is won based on the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the ordinary symbol gaming state is , the "short release pattern" is selected and set. On the other hand, if the "popular pattern per symbol 2" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the common pattern per game state is , the "short release pattern" is selected and set. As a result, when a "normal symbol" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time saving state 1, the "short opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.
On the other hand, if the "symbol 1 per ordinary symbol" is won based on the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the ordinary symbol gaming state is , the "long open pattern" is selected and set. On the other hand, if the "popular pattern per symbol 2" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 2, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the common pattern per game state is , the "long open pattern" is selected and set. As a result, when a "normal symbol" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time saving state 2, the "long open pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.

(Special design lottery)
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed.
In this embodiment, "jackpot", "time saving", and "missing" are defined as the results of the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" are defined. In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that a "small win" is not won in the first special symbol lottery, and a "small win" can be won only in the second special symbol lottery. However, in the first special symbol lottery, there may be a configuration in which a "small hit" can be won with a lower probability than in the second special symbol lottery.
As shown in FIGS. 4(b) and (c), in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), the probability of winning the "jackpot" is 1/300 (depending on the setting value). change). In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small win" by special symbol lottery does not change depending on the gaming state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big hit" through the special symbol lottery changes depending on the set value. On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small hit" in the special symbol lottery does not change depending on the set value. Note that the probability of winning a "big hit" through the special symbol lottery may be configured such that it does not change depending on the set value.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the pachinko machine 1, "jackpot symbol 1" is selected as the winning type (type of "jackpot symbol") when a "jackpot" is won in the first special symbol lottery. , "Jackpot symbol 2" are defined.
In the first special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if a "jackpot" is won, the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 1" is 1/2, and the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 2" is 1/2. 2.
When the "jackpot symbol 1" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "winning symbol" are stopped and displayed.
The "winning symbol" is, for example, the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 and indicates the same number such as "1, 1, 1". The display mode is such that the second performance symbols z2, which are arranged in "numeric symbols" and are stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4, show a predetermined color.
If the "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "winning symbol" are stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the pachinko machine 1, the winning type (type of "time saving symbol") selected when "time saving" is won in the first special symbol lottery is "time saving symbol 1". , "Time-saving symbol 2" and "Time-saving symbol 3" are defined.
In the first special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if "time saver" is won, the probability of winning "time saver symbol 1" is 20/100, and the probability of winning "time saver symbol 2" is 30/100. 100, the probability of winning "Time-saving symbol 3" is 50/100.
When the "time saving symbol 1" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saving symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device. In addition, if the "time saving symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the stop symbol corresponding to the "chance symbol" ( The display mode of production symbols z1 and z2) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state (time saving state 1 or time saving state 2), " The stop symbols (display modes of production symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "missing symbol" are stopped and displayed.
"Chance symbols" are, for example, when the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 is a predetermined combination of "1, 2, 3," etc. The display mode is such that the second performance symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4, shows a predetermined color.
A "missing symbol" means, for example, that at least one of the first performance symbols z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, The combination is such that identification information different from the first performance symbol z1 is displayed, and the second performance symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance symbol display area a4 is a display mode in which the second performance symbol z2 shows a predetermined color.
When the "time saving symbol 2" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saving symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "missing symbol" are stopped and displayed.
When the "time saving symbol 3" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saving symbol 3" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "missing symbol" are stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), in the pachinko machine 1, "jackpot symbol 3" is selected as the winning type (type of "jackpot symbol") when a "jackpot" is won in the second special symbol lottery. , "Jackpot symbol 4" are defined.
In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if you win the "jackpot", the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 3" is 50/100, and the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 4" is 50/100. It is 100.
When the "jackpot symbol 3" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 3" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "winning symbol" are stopped and displayed.
When the "jackpot symbol 4" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "jackpot symbol 4" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "winning symbol" are stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 6(d), in the pachinko machine 1, the "small win symbol" is selected as the winning type ("small win symbol" type) selected when a "small win" is won in the second special symbol lottery. 1" and "Small winning symbol 2" are defined.
In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if a "small win" is won, the probability of winning "small win symbol 1" is 50/100, and the probability of winning "small win symbol 2" is 50/100. , 50/100.
When the "small winning symbol 1" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "small winning symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "winning symbol" are stopped and displayed.
When the "small winning symbol 2" is won, the stop symbol corresponding to the "small winning symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "winning symbol" are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery is unsuccessful (in the case of "lost"), the stop symbol corresponding to the "lost symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "missing symbol" are stopped and displayed.
If the second special symbol lottery is unsuccessful (in the case of "lost"), the stop symbol corresponding to the "lost symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4, stop symbols (display modes of performance symbols z1 and z2) corresponding to the "missing symbol" are stopped and displayed.

When "Jackpot Symbol 1" to "Jackpot Symbol 4" are won, a jackpot game state occurs. In the jackpot game state, the special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, making it possible (easily) for the game ball to enter the jackpot opening 55.
While the jackpot game state is occurring, a predetermined number of round games are executed. When the "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times]. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times]. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 4 [times].
In addition, when winning "Jackpot Symbol 1" to "Jackpot Symbol 4", the longest opening time of the special electric accessory 55a in each round game is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 29.0 [s]). ) is set.
In each round game, (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) the game to the big prize opening 55 during the execution of the round game. The process is terminated when any one of the following conditions is satisfied: the number of balls entering the ball reaches a predetermined upper limit (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]).

At the end of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of time reductions (first number of time reductions and second number of time reductions) is set. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is started according to the set time saving number of times. As a result, the time saving state (time saving state 1 or time saving state 2) is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state.
In this embodiment, time saving control 1 (time saving state 1) and time saving control 2 (time saving state 2) are defined as the types of time saving control (time saving state). In the time saving control 1 (time saving state 1) and the time saving control 2 (time saving state 2), the probability that the "long opening pattern" will be selected when the "normal symbol hit" is won in the normal symbol lottery is different. At this time, the probability that the "long opening pattern" will be selected is higher in time saving control 2 (time saving state 2) than in time saving control 1 (time saving state 1) when "normal symbol hit" is won in the normal symbol lottery. is high, which is advantageous for players.
In this embodiment, the termination conditions (hereinafter referred to as "time saving termination conditions") of the time saving control (time saving control 1 and time saving control 2) are ``time saving termination condition 1'', ``time saving termination condition 2'', and ``time saving termination condition''. Termination condition 3'' is defined.

"Time saving end condition 1" is a condition based on the second special symbol lottery (special symbol winning determination based on special symbol 2 game information). That is, the time saving end condition 1 is a condition based on the number of variable displays of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, when the number of fluctuations in the time saving medium special figure 2 reaches the first time saving number (prescribed number of times) set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving end condition 1 is satisfied.
“Number of times the special symbol 2 changes during time saving” is the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner which is executed (started) during the time saving control.
When the time saving end condition 1 is satisfied, the time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is ended at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol that triggered the time saving ending condition 1 to be satisfied.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the number of times the time-saving special map 2 changes. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the first time saving number according to the winning type (type of winning symbol) as the value of the first time saving counter. Further, each time the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter. Then, in response to the value of the first time saving counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", time saving end condition 1 is satisfied and time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is stopped. As a result, when the number of variable displays of the second special symbol executed during time saving control reaches the first time saving number (specified number of times) set at the end of the jackpot game state, time saving end condition 1 is established. I will do it.
In addition, the number of special figure hit determinations (start determination) based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is the first time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state. A configuration may also be adopted in which the time saving termination condition 1 is satisfied when . Or, when the number of stop displays of the second special symbol executed during the time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) reaches the first time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving ends. A configuration in which condition 1 is satisfied may also be used.

"Time-saving termination condition 2" is a condition based on special symbol lottery (special symbol winning/losing judgment). That is, the time saving end condition 2 is a condition based on the number of variable displays of the special symbol. In this embodiment, when the number of time saving special symbols fluctuations reaches the second time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state, time saving end condition 2 is satisfied.
"Number of times the special symbol changes during time saving" is the number of times the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating during the time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2), and the number of times the first special symbol is displayed changing during the time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2). This is the total number of times of variable display of the second special symbol that was executed.
When the time-saving end condition 2 is satisfied, the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 or time-saving control 2) is ended at the end of the variable display of the special symbol that triggered the time-saving end condition 2 to be satisfied.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a second time-saving counter that counts the number of times the special figure changes during time-saving. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the second time saving number according to the winning type (type of winning symbol) as the value of the second time saving counter. Further, each time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is finished, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter. Then, in response to the value of the second time saving counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", time saving end condition 2 is satisfied and time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is stopped.
In addition, when the number of times of special map hit determination (start determination) executed during time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) reaches the second time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving A configuration in which termination condition 2 is satisfied may also be used. Or, when the number of stop displays of special symbols executed during time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) reaches the second time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state, time saving end condition 2 It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the following holds true.

"Time-saving termination condition 3" is a condition based on winning a "jackpot" (jackpot gaming state). In this embodiment, when a "jackpot" is won (when a jackpot gaming state occurs), the time saving termination condition 3 is satisfied.
When the time saving end condition 3 is satisfied, the time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is ended at the end of the stop display of the "jackpot symbol".

As shown in FIG. 6(a) or (c), if the "jackpot symbol 1" is won, at the end of the jackpot game state, 1 [times] is set as the first time reduction number, and the second time reduction number is set to 1[times]. 5 [times] is set as the number of times. Then, time saving control 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes time saving state 2.
On the other hand, if you win "Jackpot Symbol 2", "Jackpot Symbol 3", or "Jackpot Symbol 4", at the end of the jackpot game state, 100 [times] is set as the first time reduction number, and the second time reduction 105 [times] is set as the number of times. Then, time saving control 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes time saving state 2.

When the "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won, a small winning gaming state is generated. In the small winning game state, the special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and it becomes possible (easily) for the game ball to enter the big prize opening 55.
While the small winning game state is occurring, small winning games are executed a predetermined number of times. If the "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won, the number of small winning games is set to 1 [times].
In addition, when the "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won, the longest open time of the special electric accessory 55a in each small winning game is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 29.0 [s]).
For each small winning game, (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric accessory 55a was set to the open state, and (2) the large winning opening 55 is entered during the execution of the small winning game. The game ends when one of the following conditions is met: the number of game balls entered has reached a predetermined upper limit (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]).
Further, in each small winning game, the distributing means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state. At this time, in each small winning game, the distributing means is arranged so that the game ball that enters the big prize opening 55 easily (possibly) passes through the V area during the execution of the small winning game. It is displaced from the passing state to the V passing state. As a result, when the "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state. In addition, as the type of the "small winning symbol", a type that makes it difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state may be defined.

When passing through the V area by a game ball is detected during the occurrence of a small winning game state (when passing through the V area by a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 55 during execution of a small winning game) In this case, a jackpot gaming state is generated in response to the end of the small winning gaming state.
At this time, if the "small winning symbol 1" is won and passing of the V area by the game ball is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, the number of round games is set to 9 [times]. . As a result, 10 rounds will be executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
On the other hand, if the "small winning symbol 2" is won and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the number of round games is set to 3 [times]. As a result, four rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
In addition, if you win "Small winning symbol 1" or "Small winning symbol 2" and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, a special prize will be added in each round game. The longest open time of the electric accessory 55a is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
In each round game, (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) the game to the big prize opening 55 during the execution of the round game. The process is terminated when any one of the following conditions is satisfied: the number of balls entering the ball reaches a predetermined upper limit (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]).
On the other hand, if the passage of the V area by the game ball is not detected while the small winning game state is occurring (the passage of the V area by the game ball that entered the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the small winning game is not detected) ), no jackpot gaming state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 6(d), when the "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state. At the end of the jackpot game state, 100 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 105 [times] is set as the second time saving number. Then, time saving control 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes time saving state 2.

"Time-saving symbols 1" to "time-saving symbols 3" are game states (specifically, jackpot game states) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the variable ball entrance (specifically, the jackpot opening 55). (or a small winning game state) is a winning symbol that does not give a winning symbol. That is, even if "time saving symbol 1" to "time saving symbol 3" are won, the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entrance (specifically, the special electric accessory 55a) will not be executed (provided) in response to the winning. .
If you win "Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Time Saving Symbol 3" based on the start determination executed during the normal state, the time saving state (Time Saving State 1 or Time Saving State 2) will be triggered by the winning. Begins.
On the other hand, if you win "Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Time Saving Symbol 3" based on the start determination executed while the Time Saving State (Time Saving State 1 or Time Saving State 2) is occurring, the Time Saving Symbol 1 to "Time Saving Symbol 3" is won, The time-saving state 1 or the time-saving state 2) is continued, and a new time-saving state (the time-saving state 1 or the time-saving state 2) is not started in response to the winning. In other words, if you win "Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Time Saving Symbol 3" based on the start determination executed while the Time Saving State (Time Saving State 1 or Time Saving State 2) is occurring, the number of Time Saving Symbols at the time of said winning. (The first number of time reductions and the second number of time reductions) will continue, and the number of time reductions (the first number of time reductions and the second number of time reductions) will not be newly set after the winning.
As shown in FIG. 6(b), if the "time saving symbol 1" is won based on the start determination performed during the normal state, 100 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 105 [times] is set as the second time saving number of times. Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saver symbol 1", the time saver control 2 is started. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the stop display of the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saving symbol 1" becomes the time saving state 2.
On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 2" is won based on the start determination performed during the normal state, 1000 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 1000 [times] is set as the second time saving number. times] is set. Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saver symbol 2", the time saver control 1 is started. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the stop display of the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saving symbol 2" becomes the time saving state 1.
On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 3" is won based on the start determination performed during the normal state, 100 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 100 [times] is set as the second time saving number. times] is set. Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saver symbol 3", the time saver control 1 is started. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the stop display of the stop symbol corresponding to the "time saving symbol 3" becomes the time saving state 1.
On the other hand, if "time saving symbol 1" to "time saving symbol 3" are won based on the start determination executed while the time saving state (time saving state 1 or time saving state 2) is occurring, the time saving state will continue (new (The number of time saving times will not be overwritten.)

(About the play time counter)
In the pachinko machine 1, time saving control (time saving state) is started when the total number of changes in special symbols reaches a predetermined number of playing times without a jackpot game state occurring.
The "total number of changes in special symbols" is the total number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the number of times in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.
Specifically, the main control board 200 includes a play time counter that counts the total number of changes in special symbols. In the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30), which will be described later, the CPU 210 sets a predetermined number of play times (600 [times] in this embodiment) as the value of the play time counter. Furthermore, each time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is completed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the play time counter. Then, in response to the value of the play time counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", time saving control is started. Further, when a jackpot gaming state occurs, a predetermined number of playing times (in this embodiment, 600 [times]) is set as the value of the playing time counter at the end of the jackpot gaming state.
In this embodiment, in response to the value of the play time counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", 1 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 1 [times] is set as the second time saving number. ] is set, and time saving control 1 (time saving state 1) is started. In addition, in response to the value of the play time counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", 1 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 1 [times] is set as the second time saving number. A configuration may also be adopted in which the time saving control 2 (time saving state 2) is started.

(About the progress of the game)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the transition of gaming states.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a "jackpot" is won in a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the game ball into the big prize opening 55 is caused.
Furthermore, when a "small win" is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win game state is generated in which it is possible (easily) to enter the game ball into the large winning hole 55. Furthermore, when the passage of the V area by the game ball that entered the big winning hole 55 is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, it becomes possible (easily) for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 55. A jackpot gaming condition is generated.
Then, by letting the game ball enter the big winning hole 55, the player can win many prize balls.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability that a jackpot gaming state will occur based on the second special symbol drawing is higher than the probability that a jackpot gaming state will occur based on the first special symbol drawing. .
Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, since a "small win" is not set as a lottery result, a jackpot game state is generated only when a "big win" is won. The probability of winning a "jackpot" in the first special symbol lottery is 1/300 (probability according to the set value).
On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, a "big hit" and a "small win" are set as the lottery results, so if a "big hit" is won, a jackpot gaming state will occur, and a "small win" will occur. If the player wins and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected while the small win game state is occurring, the jackpot game state occurs. In particular, the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small hit" in the second special symbol lottery is 4/300.
In this way, in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot gaming state can be generated via the small winning gaming state, so the probability that the jackpot gaming state will occur is lower than that in the first special symbol lottery. It's getting expensive.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a higher possibility that a jackpot gaming state will occur when the second special symbol lottery opportunity is obtained than when the first special symbol lottery opportunity is acquired, and the player It will be advantageous.

In order to obtain the opportunity for the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to win the "general symbol" in the ordinary symbol lottery, and to keep the ordinary electric accessory 52a in the open state while the ordinary symbol gaming state is occurring. Sometimes, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a "short opening pattern" and a "long opening pattern" are defined as opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state. When the "short release pattern" is selected, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state. On the other hand, when the "long open pattern" is selected, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state.
In particular, during the occurrence of the normal state, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, during the normal state, if you win a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery, there is a 1/1 probability that it will be difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 (second (difficult to obtain special symbol lottery opportunities).
On the other hand, while the time saving state 1 is occurring, if a "normal symbol hit" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, while the time saving state 1 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, there is a probability of 1/1 that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 (the first 2) It is difficult to obtain the opportunity to draw special symbols.
On the other hand, while time saving state 2 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, while the time saving state 2 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 with a probability of 1/1. 2) It is easy to get the opportunity to draw special symbols.

In this manner, while the normal state or time saving state 1 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, even if you win a "normal symbol" in the regular symbol lottery, it is virtually impossible to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game with the aim of acquiring an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery in order to shift the gaming state to the time saving state 2. That is, the game proceeds by launching the game ball toward the left path with the aim of the game ball entering the first starting port 51.
At this time, while the normal state is occurring, if "time saving symbol 1", "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the gaming state can be shifted to time saving state 2. On the other hand, while the time saving state 1 is occurring, if the "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the gaming state can be shifted to the time saving state 2. As a result, the probability of transitioning to the time-saving state 2, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is higher when the normal state is occurring than when the time-saving state 1 is occurring (that is, when the "time-saving symbol 1" If the player wins, it becomes possible to shift to the time saving state 2), which is advantageous to the player.
On the other hand, while time saving state 2 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, if you win a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery, it becomes easy to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in order to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery, the player will proceed with the game with the aim of winning the "long open pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery. That is, the game proceeds by launching the game ball to the right path with the aim of passing the game ball through the starting gate 41.

In the pachinko machine 1, when a RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30), which will be described later, is executed, a normal state is generated. Here, as described above, the normal state has a higher probability of shifting to the time saving state 2, which is the gaming state most advantageous to the player, compared to the time saving state 1, and is advantageous to the player. In other words, the normal state has a higher probability of shifting to the time-saving state 2 compared to the time-saving state 1 because it shifts to the time-saving state 2 when the "time-saving symbol 1" is won, which is advantageous to the player. . Therefore, the normal state is a so-called "morning state."
As shown in FIG. 7, while the normal state or time saving state 1 is occurring, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed and the game progresses.
If the "jackpot symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery, the first time saving number = 1 [times] and the second time saving number = 5 [times] are set, and the jackpot game state ends. In response to this, time saving state 2 is started. On the other hand, if you win the "jackpot symbol 2" based on the first special symbol lottery, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is: 1st time saving number = 100 [times], 2nd time saving number = 105 [times] time] is set, and time saving state 2 is started.
In particular, if the "time saving symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first time saving number = 100 [times], the second time saving number = 105 [times] is set, and time saving state 2 is started in response to the stop display of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first time saving number = 1000 [times], the second time saving number = 1000 [times] is set, and time saving state 1 is started in response to the stop display of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 3" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first time saving number = 100 [times], the second time saving number = 100 [times] is set, and time saving state 1 is started in response to the stop display of the special symbol.
In addition, if you win "time saving symbol 1" to "time saving symbol 3" based on the first special symbol lottery executed while time saving state 1 is occurring, a new time saving state (first time saving number/second The current time saving state 1 (the first number of working hours and the second number of working hours) is continued. For example, when the "time saving symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed while the time saving state 1 is occurring, the time saving state 1 is continued and there is no transition to the time saving state 2.
On the other hand, while the time saving state 2 is occurring, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed and the game is progressed.
Then, when "Jackpot symbol 3" or "Jackpot symbol 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, the first time saving number = 100 [times] and the second time saving number = 105 [times] are set. In response to the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving state 2 is started. On the other hand, if "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state. The first time saving number = 100 [times] and the second time saving number = 105 [times] are set, and the time saving state 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display of the first special symbol of the second time saving number is executed without the occurrence of the jackpot game state while the time saving state 1 is occurring, the time saving state is changed accordingly. 1 is finished and the normal state is started. Similarly, while the time saving state 2 is occurring, if the variable display of the second special symbol of the first time saving number is executed without the jackpot game state occurring, the time saving state 2 is ended accordingly. Then, the normal state starts.
Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1, when the total number of changes in special symbols reaches a predetermined number of play times (in this embodiment, 600 [times]) without a jackpot game state occurring, the first time saving number = 1 [times], the second time saving number = 1 [times] is set, and time saving control 1 is started.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to shift to the normal state (morning state) when the total number of changes in special symbols reaches a predetermined number of play times (in this embodiment, 600 [times]). becomes.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, if the "time saving symbol 2" is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first time saving number = 1000 [times] and the second time saving number = 1000 [times]. ] is set, and time saving state 1 (hereinafter referred to as "long time saving state") is started. At this time, a number greater than a predetermined play time number (600 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the second time saving number. As a result, if the jackpot game state does not occur while the long time saving state is occurring, the predetermined play time is The number of times (600 [times]) will be reached. Then, during the occurrence of the long time saving state, if the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol reaches the predetermined number of playing times (600 [times]) without the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the first time saving state The number of times = 1 [times] and the second time saving number = 1 [times] are set, and a new time saving state 1 (hereinafter referred to as "play time time saving state") is started. After that, while the play time shortening state is occurring, if the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol reaches the second time shortening number (1 [times]), the play time shortening state is ended and the normal state (morning state ) is started.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is only possible to set the normal state (morning state) in response to power-on (specifically, execution of the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30)). Instead, during the game, the normal state (morning state) occurs when the total number of special symbol fluctuations (specifically, the number of times the first special symbol fluctuates) reaches a predetermined number of play times. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to improve the gameplay.
Here, on the display screen 31a, in accordance with the start of the long time saving state, the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the first special symbol required until the normal state (morning state) starts (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of fluctuations") A configuration may also be adopted in which the display of a suggestion image (an image of a meter or the like indicating the remaining number of fluctuations) indicating the number of fluctuations remaining may be started. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the remaining number of fluctuations based on the display of the suggestion image, and it becomes possible to further improve the gameplay.

(About control commands)
Next, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300 and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be explained.
The main control board 200 and the production control board 300 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the production control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300, and the communication from the production control board 300 to the main control board 200 is Not done.
Each control command sent from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300 is composed of 1 byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and 1 byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the production control board 300 by serial communication. When the production control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and by this interrupt processing, data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands sent from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300 include a special pattern type designation command, a special pattern fluctuation mode designation command, a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command, and a special pattern stop designation command. , common pattern design type command, common pattern fluctuation pattern specification command, common pattern stop specification command, game state specification command, special pattern reservation number specification command, general pattern reservation number specification command, opening specification command, round start specification command, round An end designation command, an ending designation command, a V prize designation command, a first read ahead designation command, a second read ahead designation command, a third read ahead designation command, an error designation command, a demo designation command, a set value designation command, etc. are set.
The special symbol type designation command specifies the type of stop symbol of the special symbol ("missing symbol", "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 4", "small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 2", and "time saving symbol"). This is a command that specifies one of the types from 1 to 3. The special symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Here, the special symbol type designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).

The special symbol variation mode designation command is a command that specifies the type of variation mode (variation mode number) of the special symbol. The special figure variation mode designation command specifies the variation time associated with the variation mode number by specifying the variation mode number. The special symbol variation mode designation command specifies the variation time of the first half period (aspect of the first half period of the variation production) among the variation display (variation production) of the special symbol.
In this embodiment, m (plural) types of special symbol variation modes are set, which are associated with different variation times. The special figure variation mode designation command specifies one of the m types of variation modes (variation mode numbers) ("variation mode m").
The special symbol variation pattern designation command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the special symbol. The special figure variation pattern designation command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The special symbol variation pattern designation command specifies the variation time of the second half period (aspect of the second half period of the variation production) among the variation display (variation production) of the special symbol.
In this embodiment, n (plural) types of special symbol variation patterns are set, which are associated with mutually different variation times. The special figure variation pattern designation command specifies one of the n types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) ("variation pattern n").
The special symbol fluctuation mode designation command and the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display.

The special symbol stop designation command is a command that designates the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. The special symbol stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol stop display. Here, the special figure stop designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The ordinary symbol type designation command is a command that specifies the type of the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol ("design 1 per ordinary symbol" or "design 2 per ordinary symbol"). The ordinary symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuating display of ordinary symbols.
The normal pattern variation pattern designation command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) of the normal symbol. The common figure variation pattern designation command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number.
The normal pattern stop designation command is a command that specifies the stop display of the normal pattern. The normal pattern stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the normal pattern stop display.
The gaming state designation command is a command that designates the gaming state (gaming state offset value). Here, the "gaming state offset value" is information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, numerical values corresponding to each combination of the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag, and the value of the rotation number counter after jackpot are set as the gaming state offset value. The gaming state designation command specifies one gaming state offset value. The gaming state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special gaming phase, which will be described later, and the like.

The reserved number of special symbols designation command is a command that specifies the number of reserved special symbols. In this embodiment, the command to specify the number of reserved special figures indicates that the number of reserved figures (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) has increased by "1" and the number of reserved figures (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2). ) has decreased by "1", the number of reservations (number of special drawings 1 or number of special drawings 2), etc. are specified.
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of pending notification displays (fluctuating display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device. In other words, the special figure 1 pending number refers to the number of special figure 1 game information whose start determination is pending. In addition, the "special figure 2 pending number" refers to the number of notification displays (fluctuating display and stop display) of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 display device that are pending. In other words, the special figure 2 pending number refers to the number of special figure 2 game information for which start determination is pending.
The reserved number of special symbols designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when storing game information, when starting variable display of special symbols, etc. Here, the special figure reservation number designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The reserved number of ordinary symbols designation command is a command that specifies the number of reserved ordinary symbols. In this embodiment, the reserved number of special symbols designation command specifies that the number of reserved symbols is increased by "1", that the number of reserved symbols is decreased by "1", and the number of reserved symbols is reserved.
Here, the "number of normal symbols pending" refers to the number of normal symbol notification displays (fluctuating display and stop display) on the common symbol display device. In other words, the number of pending common figures refers to the number of pieces of common figure game information for which the winning or losing determination of common figures is pending.
The command for specifying the number of reserved ordinary symbols is transmitted when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the fluctuating display of ordinary symbols starts, etc.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the small winning gaming state or the jackpot gaming state). The opening specification command specifies the type of small hit game state or jackpot game state to start (type of stop symbol (specifically, "small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 2" and "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol"). Specify one of the types of "Symbol 4"). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small win gaming state or the jackpot gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round (small winning game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round (small winning game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command that designates the end of a round (small winning game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of a round (small winning game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period. The ending designation command is sent at the start of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command that designates the detection of passage of the V area by the game ball. The V winning prize designation command is transmitted when passage of the V area by the game ball is detected.

The first look-ahead designation command is based on the type of stop symbol of the special symbol ("missing symbol", "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 4", "small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 2", and "time saving symbol 1"). ” to “time-saving symbol 3”). Here, the first pre-read designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The second prefetch designation command is a command that designates the contents of the special symbol variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation mode is undefined ("undefined value"), or that it is one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m"). ). The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when storing game information.
The third pre-read designation command is a command that designates the contents of the special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation pattern is undefined ("undefined value"), or that it is one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n"). ). The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when storing game information.

The error specification command is a command that specifies the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-handed error. The error specification command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state. The demo designation command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.
The setting value specification command is a command for specifying the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value designation command is transmitted when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after being turned on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, and so on.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is performed bidirectionally. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
The main control board 200 then transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 through serial communication. When the payout control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and by this interrupt processing, data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. Further, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by processing this interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command and the like are set as control commands sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the prize ball number designation command specifies the payout of n prize balls (n=1 to 15). The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of prize balls.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands sent from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include occurrence and cancellation of a payout error, occurrence and cancellation of a full tank error, occurrence and cancellation of a ball jam error, etc. Control commands are set to specify each. Each control command is sent when the occurrence or cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed by main control board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be explained.
First, the functions of the hardware configured in the main control board 200 will be explained.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generation circuit 203 starts a hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]), the values of the first to third loop counters are changed within a predetermined range. (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) is updated by "1".
In addition, in the hard random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]), the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10006).
Then, by the hard random number update process, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated. Note that the hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the production control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Start control command sending processing. Note that the control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, the game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, initial setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary for executing various processes, such as register settings, are performed.
In the initial setting process, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 are read.

Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the read result twice, the RAM clear switch 207 is set to the on state. Determine whether or not this has occurred. Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that an on state has occurred, a value indicating that an on state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as switch information, and the on state is not generated. If it is determined that no on state has occurred, a value (in this embodiment, "0") indicating that no on state has occurred is stored as switch information.

Also, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and the setting key switch 208 is turned on based on the reading result twice. Determine whether or not. Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that an on state has occurred, a value indicating that an on state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as switch information, and the on state is not generated. If it is determined that no on state has occurred, a value (in this embodiment, "0") indicating that no on state has occurred is stored as switch information.

Furthermore, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read two times, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is set to the ON state based on the read result two times. Determine whether or not this has occurred. If it is determined that the on state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (in this embodiment, "0") indicating that the on state has not occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined that an on state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. As a result, the timer counter starts measuring the set wait processing time.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process moves to step S1-4, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to allow access to the work area of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. This allows the CPU 210 to access the RAM 230.

In step S1-5, gaming machine status flag acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine state flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) in the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process moves to step S1-7, and the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process moves to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area is determined to be normal. is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process moves to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process moves to step S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the usage area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the usage area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "the checksum value of the usage area M1 calculated in step S1-7" - The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area. Determine that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the usage area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the usage area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "the checksum value of the usage area M1 calculated in step S1-7" The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area.'' If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, a power-on clear target area setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) in areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, A backup valid flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, a normal game related area 2, and a stack area) are set.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 is in the on state or not, and if it is determined that the on state is not occurring (No), the process moves to step S1-11, If it is determined that the on state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state. At this time, if a value indicating that an on state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that an on state has occurred, and a value indicating that an on state has not occurred is saved. If it is, it is determined that an on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred (set). If it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S1-12, and the game is started. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine status flag stored in the D register has a value corresponding to a gaming enabled state, it is determined that a gaming enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a gaming enabled state, the gaming It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process moves to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that this is not true (No), the process moves to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation conditions" are that the gaming enabled state is occurring, the RAM clear switch 207 is not in the on state, the setting key switch 208 is in the on state, and This is true when the frame open sensor 108 is in the on state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not in the on state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state is not occurring. As a result, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. . On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not in the on state, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an on state has occurred is saved as switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met, and a value indicating that an on state has not occurred is saved. If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a clear target area setting process is executed when the power is restored, and the process moves to step S1-15. In the clearing target area setting process when the power is restored, the area to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is the setting value area, gaming machine status flag area, normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area. Areas (specifically, a checksum area, a backup valid flag area, an error-related area, and a normal game-related area 1) are set.

In step S1-15, initialization processing upon power restoration is executed, and the process moves to step S1-16. In the power-return initialization process, the range set in step S1-14 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, a sub-command transmission process is executed when the power is restored, and the process moves to step S1-17. In the power-return subcommand transmission process, a subcommand specifying that the power has been restored from power-off is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, a payout command transmission process is executed when the power is restored, and the process moves to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the power is restored, a payout command specifying that the power has been restored from the power cut is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
In step S1-20, abnormality clearing target area setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-21. In the abnormality clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, setting value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag) are cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230. area, error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area).

In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range set in step S1-20 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
Specifically, in the used area read/write check process, all areas of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 (specifically, the setting value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
As a result, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the regular symbol display symbol counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read/write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal, and if it is determined that the result of the read/write check is not normal (No), , the process moves to step S1-23, and if it is determined that the result of the read/write check is normal (Yes), the process moves to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, RAM abnormal state setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether the settings confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the settings confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S1-25, and the settings If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether a setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine status flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is determined to have occurred. It is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a game enable state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-26. In the game-enabled state setting process, a value corresponding to the game-enabled state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process moves to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that this is not true (No), the process moves to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, the setting key switch 208 is turned on, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. It holds true if
Here, as described above, if both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 indicates that the on state has occurred. The value is saved. On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not in the on state, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, which were saved in step S1-1. .
At this time, if a value indicating that an on state has occurred is stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, the setting change condition is satisfied. It is determined that On the other hand, if a value indicating that an on state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, the setting change condition is satisfied. It is determined that the

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as a gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, a gaming machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-29. In the gaming machine state flag saving process, the gaming machine state flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand specifying that RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-30, RAM clear initialization processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the RAM 230 is initialized. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the RAM clear initialization process, other areas of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 excluding the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, Error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
As a result, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the regular symbol display symbol counter.
In particular, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "600") is set as the value of the play time counter. Also, a left-handed hitting period (left-handed hitting state) is set. Furthermore, in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, a value (in this embodiment, "0") corresponding to the normal state (morning state) is set, and each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter) is set. Set "0" as the value.
In step S1-31, a RAM clear payout command transmission process is executed, and the process moves to step S1-32. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, a payout command specifying that RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, subcommand setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is sent to the subcommand output request of the RAM 230. Store in buffer.
In step S1-33, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the power recovery phase, a subcommand that specifies the gaming state (gaming state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, and a stop symbol for the first special symbol. sub-command to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, sub-command to specify the number of reserved special figures 1, sub-command to specify the number of reserved special figures 2, sub-command to specify the value of the time-saving counter, RAM230 This includes subcommands that specify the setting values stored in the setting value area of .

In step S1-34, initial display time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
In step S1-35, interrupt setting processing is executed, and the process moves to main loop processing (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(main loop processing)
Next, the main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be explained.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
Upon completion of the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process is started, the process first moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-2. In the interrupt disabling process, an interrupt disabling state is set to disable interrupts of other processes. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later, is prohibited during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process moves to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating an initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (winning symbol random number, reach mode random number, fluctuation pattern random number, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from a preset initial value to an end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (the control command sent from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and processing is executed according to the analysis result.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is memorized (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the production control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. is permitted during the period from execution of the interrupt enable processing in step S2-5 until execution of the interrupt disable processing in step S2-1. This is the interrupt permission period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process moves to step S2-1. In other random number update processing, soft random numbers excluding winning symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation processing when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the evacuation process when the power is cut off.
The main control board 200 includes a power cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600 and outputs a power cutoff notice signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
Upon receiving the power cutoff notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power cutoff saving process shown in FIG. 10 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the power-off saving process is based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power-off saving process is started, the process first moves to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved to the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, a power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal), whether or not the power cutoff notice signal is input from the power cutoff detection circuit is determined. If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been inputted (Yes), the process moves to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been inputted (No), the process proceeds to step S3-4. Then, the process moves to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process moves to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) are initialized. This causes the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) to stop outputting control signals and control commands.
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process moves to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal is read is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, a power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal), it is determined whether the power cutoff notice signal is input from the power cutoff detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been inputted (No), the process moves to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been inputted (Yes). If so, the process moves to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process moves to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for return determination is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the loop counter for return determination is "0" (Yes), the CPU The process moves to initialization processing (step S1-1), and if it is determined that the value of the loop counter for return determination is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, register restoration processing is executed, the series of processing is completed, and the original processing is resumed. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be explained.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-2. In the register saving process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved to the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, interrupts are permitted.

In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-4. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.
In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-5. In the port input process, the status of each switch/sensor is acquired.
The RAM 230 is provided with an on-state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is in an on state. Here, the "on state" refers to a state changed from a state in which no detection signal is input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is input (high level). At this time, based on information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, it is determined whether the switch/sensor is in an on state.
If it is determined that an on-state has occurred for each switch/sensor, "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on-state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the on-state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor will be referred to as "switch bit data" of that switch/sensor.

In step S4-5, gaming machine status flag acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not the game-enabled state has occurred (set). If it is determined that the game-enabled state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S4-7, and the game If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not a gaming enabled status has occurred. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to a game-ready state, it is determined that a game-ready state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a game-ready state, it is determined that a game-ready state has occurred. It is determined that the

In step S4-7, it is determined whether an abnormal state has occurred (set) or not. If it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S4-8, and if the abnormal state is If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine state flag does not have a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state, it is determined that no abnormal state has occurred.

In step S4-8, setting-related processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-19. Setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, timer update processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating an initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-12. In the winning pattern random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning pattern random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, switch management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processes (such as obtaining various random numbers) are executed depending on the state of each switch 101, 102, 104, and 110 (whether or not an on state is detected). The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, special game management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display devices (the special figure 1 display device and the special figure 2 display device) and the operation of the special electric accessory 55a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal figure display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, state management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined and settings are made according to the determination results.

In step S4-16, winning a prize opening switch processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-17. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (updating various counters, etc.) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 103, 105, 106 (whether or not an on state is detected).
In this embodiment, the prize ball control counter 1 stores the number of ball game balls that entered the big winning hole 55, and the number of ball game balls that entered the left other winning holes 57a to 57c. A prize ball control counter 2 that is stored, a prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of game balls that have entered the other right prize opening 56, and a prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 51. A prize ball control counter 4 and a prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 52 are stored are set.
In the winning opening switch process, it is determined whether the on state is detected for each switch 101, 102, 103, 105, 106, and if it is determined that the on state is detected, the prize ball control counter corresponding to the switch is Add "1" to the values 1 to 5.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 15 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to reception of the main command specifying completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to reception of the main command specifying completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to reception of the main command specifying completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command is generated that specifies the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process moves to step S4-19. In the firing position designation management process, processing related to designation of the firing position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left path is specified to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right path is specified (in the small hit game state or the jackpot game state) At the time of starting, etc.), "1" is set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230, and a subcommand designating launching the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a sub-command specifying launching of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the production control board 300.
On the other hand, when changing the state from specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path (such as at the end of time saving control 2), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is Set "0".
In this embodiment, while the "normal state" or "time saving state 1" is occurring, "0" is set in the firing position designation flag area, and the left-hand path is set as the path to launch the game ball on the right-hand hitting display device. The information you specify is displayed.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of "Time saving state 2", "Small hit gaming state" or "Jackpot gaming state", "1" is set in the firing position designation flag area, and the path to which the game ball should be launched is displayed on the right-hand hitting display device. information specifying the right route is displayed.

In step S4-19, external information management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to external devices (electronic devices such as hall computers and data display devices) includes symbol confirmation number information, starting opening information, jackpot information, security information, and out opening. Information on the number of payouts, error occurrence information, etc. are specified.
The "design confirmed number of times information" is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (fluctuating display and stop display of special symbols). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to symbol confirmation number information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the special symbol stop display reaches a predetermined number.
The "starting port information" is external information regarding the entry of game balls into the starting ports 51 and 52. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting port information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting port switches 101, 102 is detected.
“Jackpot information” is external information regarding the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
"Outlet payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out hole payout number information to the hole computer every time the value of the out ball counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
"Security information" is external information indicating that a settings change state is occurring, a settings confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information confirmation number counter has reached a predetermined value, symbol confirmation number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is subtracted from the value of the external information confirmation count counter. As a result, symbol confirmation number information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information starting port entry number counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]). If it is determined that the value of the external information starting port entry number counter has reached a predetermined value, the starting port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting port entry number counter. As a result, starting port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot number counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot number counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot number counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information out pitch counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the out pitch number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the out outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is subtracted from the value of the outside information out pitch number counter. As a result, the outlet payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to a gaming enabled status.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is not a value that corresponds to a game-enabled status (corresponding to a setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting abnormality status, RAM abnormality status, or backup abnormality status). value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the security timer is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, LED display setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). It is being
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".
Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to a game-enabled state, a normal time display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (abnormal setting state, abnormal RAM state, or abnormal backup state), an abnormal time display data setting process to be described later is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is transferred to the common 0 output request buffer. Set.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8 among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is acquired, and display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16 among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the common figure display pattern counter is acquired, and display data corresponding to the obtained value of the common figure display pattern counter is set as output data a.

Next, the values set in the winning special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 are "state before opening of the first grand prize opening", "state of first grand prize opening opening control state", and "first grand prize opening closing enabled". "state", "first grand prize opening end wait state", "second grand prize opening pre-opening state", "second grand prize opening control state", "second grand prize opening closing effective state", and "second grand prize opening opening state" It is determined whether the value specifies any special game phase among the two major winning opening opening end wait states.
Then, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning are "state before opening of first grand prize opening", "first grand prize opening control state", "first grand prize opening closing effective state", “First grand prize opening end wait state”, “Second grand prize opening state before opening”, “Second grand prize opening control state”, “Second grand prize opening closing effective state” and “Second grand prize opening state” If it is determined that the value specifies any special game phase among the "mouth open end wait state", the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol) is Display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning are "state before first grand prize opening opening", "first grand prize opening control state", "first grand prize opening closing effective state", “First grand prize opening end wait state”, “Second grand prize opening state before opening”, “Second grand prize opening control state”, “Second grand prize opening closing effective state” and “Second grand prize opening state” If it is determined that the value does not specify any special game phase in the "mouth open end wait state", the output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data c.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, the normal symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18 among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, and the number of round games executed during the jackpot gaming state (type of jackpot gaming state) is displayed by the LEDs 19 to 23. is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) in which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the general figure reservation counter is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data f.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is time to restore the power.
When it is determined that it is time to restore the power, the value set in the time saving control flag area is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data h.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special symbols 1, the LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special symbols 2, and the LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of regular symbols reserved. The number of pending games is displayed, the LED 31 displays the gaming state (running or stopping time saving control) when the power is restored, and the LED 32 displays the current gaming state (running or stopping time saving control). .

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the "-" Display data (8 bits) is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "r" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the letter "n." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and the letter "n." is displayed by LED49 to LED56. -" characters are displayed, and the LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set values.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that a setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. Display data corresponding to the set value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that display data is not set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "r" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the letter "n." is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the setting is made by the LEDs 57 to 64. A number indicating the value will be displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the error that occurs is Display data (error code) corresponding to the state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that display data is not set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "E" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the letter "r." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and the letter "r." is displayed by LED57 to LED64. A number indicating the code will be displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, solenoid data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64, 65, and 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, each solenoid 64, 65, 66, etc.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output ports 205 (output ports 2, 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, each of the solenoids 64, 65, and 66 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-24. In the interrupt disabling process, an interrupt disabling state is set to disable interrupts of other processes. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later, is prohibited during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set.

In step S4-24, test signal output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing the process related to the test specified by the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time saving control execution status, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-25, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process moves to step S4-26. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-26, register restoration processing is executed, the series of processing is completed, and the original processing is resumed. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output processing in step S4-3 will be explained.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 12, the process first moves to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, output data clearing processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-2. In the output data clearing process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. As a result, output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 becomes low level.
In step S29-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes low level.

In step S29-4, common selection processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "3"). If it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, common output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-6. In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
Specifically, in common output processing, when the value of the common counter = "0", output data with "COM0" set to high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" set to low level is output. Output to port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is set to high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are set to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", output data in which "COM2" is set to high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are set to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is set to high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are set to low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) among "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred (set). If it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S29-7, and the game is started. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S29-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not a game enabled state has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to a game-enabled state, it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a game-enabled state, the game It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, main display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is a common This is the display data set in the 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-8, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are transmitted to the source driver. 250a.
That is, the display of the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-10. In the interrupt disabling process, an interrupt disabling state is set to disable interrupts of other processes. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later, is prohibited during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set.
In step S29-10, performance display device output processing is executed, the series of processing is completed, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-4). The performance display device output process will be described later.

In step S29-11, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, the setting confirmation In the time display data setting process or abnormal time display data setting process), the display data becomes the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, the data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are transmitted to the source driver. 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer among the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be explained.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device output process is based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, as shown in FIG. 13, the process first moves to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S30-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Further, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved to the save area of the RAM.

In step S30-2, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the confirmed common counter value of the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register. .
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process in step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process. The displayed data will be displayed.

In step S30-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process moves to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, register restoration processing is executed, and the process moves to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the value of the register saved in step S30-1 are The saved stack pointer value (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) is restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, the series of processing ends, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-4). In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. This allows execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be explained.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first moves to step S37-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a settings change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a settings change state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S37-2, and the setting change state is set. If it is determined that the changed state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is a value corresponding to a setting change state, it is determined that a setting change state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a setting change state, the setting change state is determined to have occurred. It is determined that no change state has occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded) and the acquired setting values are stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process moves to step S37-4, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed. If it is determined that 207 has not been pressed (No), the process moves to step S37-5.
Here, if the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if the ON state has not been generated, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, a setting value update process is executed, and the process moves to step S37-5. In the setting value update process, "1" is added to the setting value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and If it is determined that the set value is not less than the set comparison value (the set value is greater than or equal to the predetermined set comparison value) (No), the process moves to step S37-6, and the set value stored in the register is set to the predetermined set comparison value. If it is determined that it is less than the value (Yes), the process moves to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a setting value initialization process is executed, and the process moves to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is overwritten as the setting value stored in the register.
In step S37-7, a setting value saving process is executed, and the process moves to step S37-8. In the setting value saving process, the setting values stored in the register are saved in the setting value area of the RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (in the OFF state) (No), The process moves to step S37-9, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-19). .
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and if the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. It is determined that it has not been done.
In step S37-9, subcommand setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end designation command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S37-10, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the gaming state (gaming state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the second special symbol. Sub-command to specify the symbol, sub-command to specify the number of special figures 1 on hold, sub-command to specify the number of special figures 2 on hold, sub-command to specify the value of the time-saving counter, settings stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 Contains subcommands that specify values.
In step S37-11, a ram set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-19). In the RAM set process, a game ready state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to the game-enabled state is saved as a value in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management processing)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be explained.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 15, the process first moves to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process moves to step S5-2, and the gate If it is determined that the on state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process moves to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal pattern starting ball detection process is executed, and the process moves to step S5-3. The normal figure starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special drawing 1 starting port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), step If the process moves to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process moves to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, special figure 1 starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process moves to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special drawing 2 starting port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), step If the process moves to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected (No), the process moves to step S5-7.

In step S5-6, special figure 2 starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process moves to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether the on-state of the V-area switch 110 has been detected, and if it is determined that the on-state of the V-area switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process moves to step S5-8. If it is determined that the on state of the V area switch 110 has not been detected (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-8, a V passing detection process is executed, and the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-13).
In the V passing detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V is in the valid period.
Here, the "V validity period" is from the start of the first small winning game that is executed during the occurrence of any small winning game state of "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2", This is the period until the big winning hole closing effective time (interval time) elapses after the end of the first small winning game.
If it is determined that it is within the V validity period, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V is not within the valid period, the process ends.

(Full pattern starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal figure starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be explained.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the normal figure starting ball detection process.
When the normal figure starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 16, the process first moves to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, a general pattern random number acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S6-2. In the normal pattern random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random values) such as a winning random number and a pattern random number per normal pattern are obtained (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to each lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the general figure reservation number counter is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"), and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary figure reservation number counter is not the upper limit value If (No), the process moves to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure reservation counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S5-3) is performed. Move on to 3).
In step S6-3, a process for updating the number of reserved ordinary drawings counter is executed, and the process moves to step S6-4. In the ordinary figure reservation number counter updating process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the ordinary figure reservation number counter is newly set in the ordinary figure reservation number counter.

In step S6-4, a general pattern random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal pattern random number storage process, the winning random number and the pattern random number per normal pattern obtained in step S6-1 are stored in the normal pattern game information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal pattern game information.
The RAM 230 is configured to include a standard game information storage area in which standard game information is stored.
The general figure game information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing general figure game information.
In the storage area 0, general figure game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, in storage areas 1 to 4, the normal pattern game information for which the normal pattern winning/losing determination is pending is stored. The priority order of each storage area is defined in order of priority: storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower). Then, the winning/losing determination of the winning or losing of the winning or losing of the winning or losing of the winning of the winning or losing of the winning of the winning or losing of the winning or losing of the winning or losing of the winning or losing of the game information stored in the storage area 1 to the storage area 4 is performed in the order of the information stored in the storage area having the higher priority.
In addition, in the ordinary figure random number storage process, a ordinary figure pending number designation command specifying that the ordinary figure pending number has been increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 17, the process first moves to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, special symbol identification value setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Further, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting port entry number counter.
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S7-3. In the reservation number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is set in the reservation number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process in step S5-6 will be explained.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 18, the process first moves to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, special symbol identification value setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Further, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting port entry number counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-handed hitting period is in progress. If it is determined that the game is not in the right-handed batting period (it is in the left-handed batting period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed batting error counter.
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S8-3. In the reservation number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is set in the reservation number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition processing in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be explained.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 19, the process first moves to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, special symbol identification value acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S9-3. In the special figure reservation number acquisition process, the value of the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area (special figure 1 reservation number counter) number or special map 2 pending number).

In step S9-3, special figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S9-4. In the special pattern random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as jackpot random numbers, hit pattern random numbers, reach group random numbers, reach mode random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, the number of reserved special drawings (the number of reserved special drawings 1 or the number of reserved special drawings 2) acquired in step S9-2 is set to an upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 1 = "4"). ", the upper limit value of the number of special drawings 2 reserved = "1"), and if it is determined that the number of special drawings reserved is not the upper limit value (No), proceed to step S9-5, If it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7).
In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved special drawings 2 is set to "1". However, the upper limit value of the number of reserved special figures 2 may be set to "0".
In step S9-5, a special figure pending number counter update process is executed, and the process moves to step S9-6. In the special figure reservation number counter update process, the value set in the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area The value obtained by adding "1" to the above is newly set in the special figure pending number counter.

In step S9-6, special figure random number storage processing is executed, and the process moves to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information) of the RAM 230 as special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information). information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 is configured to include a special figure 1 game information storage area where special figure 1 game information is stored, and a special figure 2 game information storage area where special figure 2 game information is stored.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas in which special figure 1 game information can be stored.
In storage area 0, special figure 1 game information during game execution is stored. On the other hand, special figure 1 game information whose start determination is pending is stored in storage areas 1 to 4. The priority order of each storage area is defined in order of priority: storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower). Then, the start determination of the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage areas 1 to 4 is performed in the order of priority stored in the storage areas with higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 1 as storage areas in which special figure 2 game information can be stored.
In storage area 0, special figure 2 game information during game execution is stored. On the other hand, in the storage area 1, special figure 2 game information whose start determination is pending is stored.

In the special symbol random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special symbol 1 game information. , is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in an empty storage area among storage areas 1 to 4 (the storage area with the highest priority among the empty storage areas). .
That is, when the current value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter = "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. On the other hand, if the current value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter = "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the current value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the current value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special symbol 2 game information to play the special symbol 2 game. Store in the information storage area. At this time, various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in storage area 1.
That is, when the current value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter = "0", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1.

In step S9-7, a command setting process for specifying the number of reservations is executed, and the process moves to step S9-8. In the reservation number specification command setting process, the special figure reservation number designation command that specifies that the number of reserved special figures (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of special figures 2 reserved) has been increased by "1" is sent to the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. to be memorized. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the special symbol reservation number specifies that the special symbol 1 reservation number has increased by "1". Store the specified command in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, specify the number of special symbols reserved that specifies that the number of reserved special symbols 2 has increased by "1". The command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-8, a preliminary determination process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7). In the preliminary determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information storage area) saved (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6 2 game information) (hereinafter referred to as "game information subject to preliminary determination"), various lottery results are pre-determined.
In this embodiment, preliminary determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information).
Note that for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, a configuration may be adopted in which preliminary determination of various lottery results is not performed. In addition, for the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is stopped, preliminary determination of various lottery results is not performed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is being executed. Regarding this, a configuration may be adopted in which preliminary determination of various lottery results is not performed.

In the preliminary determination process, first, a preliminary special symbol hit determination process is executed.
In the advance special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit", "time saving", or "miss") is determined (preliminary special symbol hit determination).
In the ROM 220, a special pattern jackpot lottery table in which the jackpot value of the special symbol lottery is registered, a special pattern small win lottery table in which the small win value of the special symbol lottery is registered, and a time saving value of the special symbol lottery are registered. A special drawing time saving lottery table is stored. Further, as the special figure small winning lottery table, a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 gaming information are stored. Furthermore, as special figure time-saving lottery tables, a special figure time-saving lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a special figure time-saving lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
In the advance special figure hit determination process, first, the advance special figure jackpot determination process is executed.
In the advance special drawing jackpot determination process, the special drawing jackpot lottery table is read. Then, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (preliminary special chart jackpot determination) based on the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read special chart jackpot lottery table.
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination matches the jackpot value registered in the special symbol jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has been won (the special symbol lottery The result is determined to be a “jackpot”). On the other hand, when the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination does not match the jackpot value registered in the special map jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.

If it is determined that the "big hit" has not been won by the preliminary special figure jackpot determination process, then the preliminary special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the advance special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the type of game information to be determined in advance (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination and the read out special figure small win lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small win" has been won (preliminary special figure small win determination). .
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the preliminary judgment target game information matches the small win value registered in the special map small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special The result of the symbol lottery is determined to be a "small hit"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination does not match the small win value registered in the special figure small win lottery table, it is determined that the "small win" has not been won.
If it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won by the advance special symbol jackpot determination process, then the advance special symbol time saving determination process is executed.
In the advance special figure time-saving determination process, the special figure time-saving lottery table corresponding to the type of game information to be determined in advance (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination and the read special symbol time-saving lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "time-saving" prize has been won (preliminary special symbol time-saving determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination matches the time-saving value registered in the special symbol time-saving lottery table, it is determined that you have won the "time-saving" (special symbol lottery (judge the result as “time saving”). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination target game information does not match the time saving value registered in the special figure time saving lottery table, it is determined that the "time saving" has not been won.
If it is determined by the advance special symbol small hit determination process that "time saving" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "lost".
At this time, as mentioned above, if the reservation type of the game information subject to preliminary determination is special map 1 game information, one of "jackpot", "time saving", and "miss" is determined ("small hit" ” is never determined).
On the other hand, if the reservation type of the preliminary determination target game information is special drawing 2 game information, one of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" will be determined ("time saving" will be determined) ).

In the preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special symbol determination process is executed. In the advance special pattern determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special design determination).
In the preliminary special pattern pattern determination process, when it is determined as a "jackpot" (winning) by the preliminary special pattern hit determination, the type of the "jackpot symbol" is determined (preliminary special pattern pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random numbers and the types of "jackpot symbols" is registered. Further, as jackpot symbol lottery tables, a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol lottery table, "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2" are registered as types of "jackpot symbol". On the other hand, in the second jackpot symbol lottery table, "jackpot symbol 3" and "jackpot symbol 4" are registered as types of "jackpot symbol".
In the process of determining the type of the "jackpot symbol", if the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 1 game information, the first jackpot symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 2 game information, the second jackpot symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read second jackpot symbol lottery table.

On the other hand, in the preliminary special pattern determination process, when it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by the preliminary special pattern winning determination, the type of the "small winning symbol" is determined (preliminary special pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a small winning symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "small winning symbol"("small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2") is registered.
Then, in the process of determining the type of "small winning symbol", the small winning symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the advance special design symbol determination process, when it is determined as "time saving" (winning) by the advance special symbol hit determination, the type of "time saving symbol" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a time-saving symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "time-saving symbol"("time-saving symbol 1" to "time-saving symbol 3") is registered.
Then, in the process of determining the type of "time-saving symbol", the time-saving symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of time-saving symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read-out time-saving symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the advance special symbol determination process, when it is determined that it is a "miss" (defeated) by the advance special symbol hit determination, a "miss symbol" is determined as the type of the stop symbol (preliminary special symbol determination).

In the preliminary determination process, next, a first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first prefetch designation command setting process, the first prefetch designation command that designates the type of stop symbol determined by the advance special symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the preliminary determination process, next, a preliminary special symbol variation mode determination process is executed.
In the advance special figure variation mode determination process, a variation mode number (type of variation mode) and a variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) are determined.
In the advance special pattern fluctuation mode determination process, if the advance special pattern hit determination determines that it is a "big hit", "small hit" or "time saving", the fluctuation mode number (variation mode The variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a "miss" by the advance special map winning determination, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode), fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern), is determined.

In the pre-winning variation pattern determination process, first, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined (pre-winning variation mode determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variable mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variable mode number (type of variable mode) is registered.
In addition, as a winning variable mode determination table, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), gaming state ("normal state", "time saving state 1" or "time saving state 2"), and stop Corresponds to each combination of symbol types ("Jackpot symbol 1" to "Jackpot symbol 4", "Small prize symbol 1" to "Small prize symbol 2" or "Time saving symbol 1" to "Time saving symbol 3") A winning variable mode determination table is stored.
In each winning variation mode determination table, a variation mode number (type of variation mode) and a winning variation pattern determination table (information specifying the winning variation pattern determination table) correspond to each reach mode random number. It is attached. As a result, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the winning variable pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each winning variable mode determination table.
In the advance variation mode determination at the time of winning, first, the reservation type of game information subject to advance determination (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) and the current game status (``normal status'', ``time saving status 1'', or ``time saving status 1'') time saving state 2'') and the type of the stopped symbol determined by the advance special symbol determination, and read out the winning time variation mode determination table corresponding to this verification result.
Then, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the winning variable pattern determination table are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination and the read variable mode determining table at the time of winning. do.
In the pre-winning variation pattern determination process, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (pre-winning variation pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) is registered.
Further, as the winning variation pattern determination table, a plurality of winning variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored.
In the winning-time advance variation pattern determination, first, the winning-time variation pattern determination table determined by the winning-time advance variation mode determination is read.
Then, a variable pattern number (type of variable pattern) is determined based on the variable pattern random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read winning variable pattern determination table.

In the preliminary variation pattern determination process at the time of losing, first, the type ("undefined value" or "fixed value") of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination target game information is determined (previous random number type determination).
In this embodiment, "undefined value" and "fixed value" are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
"Undefined value" is the variable mode number (type of variable mode), variable pattern number (type of variable pattern), is not determined, and when executing the start determination (steps S11-7, S11-8, S11-11) based on the game information, based on the number of reservations at that time (number of special symbols 1 reservations or number of special symbols 2 reservations). , the variation mode number (type of variation mode), and the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) are the types of reach group random numbers to be determined.
"Fixed value" is the variable mode number (type of variable mode), variable pattern number (type of variable pattern), and is the type of reach group random number that is determined.
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006". Of "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are defined as "undefined values", and "8500" to "10006" are defined as "fixed values".
Therefore, in advance random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the game information subject to advance determination is less than "8500", it is determined to be "undefined value", and if it is equal to or greater than "8500", it is determined to be "fixed value". ”.

In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of rejection, if the preliminary random number type determination determines that it is an "indeterminate value", the preliminary reach group determination, the preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of rejection, and the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of rejection, which will be described later, are executed. Move on to the next process without doing so.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a "fixed value" by the preliminary random number type determination, preliminary reach group determination, preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of loss, and preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of failure are executed.

In advance reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (types of reach groups) is registered.
Further, as reach group determination tables, a reach group determination table corresponding to "undefined value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to "undefined value", a reach group number corresponding to "undefined value" (hereinafter referred to as "undefined value reach group") is registered as a reach group number. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value", the reach group number corresponding to the "fixed value" (hereinafter referred to as "fixed value reach group") is registered as the reach group number.
In advance reach group determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of rejection, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (preliminary variation mode determination at the time of rejection).
The ROM 220 stores a loss variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (variation mode types) is registered.
In addition, as a failure fluctuation mode determination table, the reach group number, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations (the number of special figures 1 reservations or the number of special figures 2 reservations), and the game A failure variation mode determination table corresponding to each combination of states ("normal state", "time saving state 1", or "time saving state 2") is stored.
In each rejection fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (variation mode type) and a rejection fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the rejection fluctuation pattern determination table) correspond to each reach mode random number. It is attached. As a result, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the rejection variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each rejection variation mode determination table.
In advance variation mode determination at the time of loss, first, the reach group number determined by advance reach group determination, the reservation type of advance determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), and advance determination target game Check the number of reservations corresponding to the information reservation type (number of special drawings 1 or number of special drawings 2 pending) and the current gaming state ("normal state", "time saving state 1" or "time saving state 2") Then, the failure variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read out fluctuation mode determination table at the time of loss, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of loss are determined. do.

In the advance fluctuation pattern determination at the time of rejection, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined (preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of rejection).
The ROM 220 stores a loss variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) is registered.
Furthermore, as the rejection variation pattern determination table, a plurality of rejection variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored.
In the advance fluctuation pattern determination at the time of rejection, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of rejection determined by the advance fluctuation mode determination at the time of rejection is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the preliminary determination target game information and the read out variation pattern determination table at the time of losing.

In the preliminary determination process, next, second and third prefetch designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes, a second look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation mode number determined by the advance fluctuation mode determination, and a third look-ahead designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number determined by the advance fluctuation pattern determination. The designated command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the advance variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is executed, a second read-ahead designation command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the prior variation mode determination at the time of winning, and the number determined by the advance variation pattern determination at the time of winning are issued. A third prefetch designation command that designates the variation pattern number that has been created is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of rejection is executed and the prior random number type determination determines that it is a "fixed value", a second look-ahead designation command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the prior variation mode determination at the time of rejection is executed. , and a third prefetch designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number determined by the advance fluctuation pattern determination at the time of failure, in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the advance variation pattern determination process at the time of rejection is executed and the preliminary random number type determination determines that it is an "undefined value", a second read-ahead designation command that specifies the "undefined value" and a second look-ahead designation command that specifies the "undefined value" is executed. 3 and the prefetch designation command are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be explained.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, the phase/stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") of the game executed based on the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") is a "special symbol change waiting state". , "Special figure fluctuating state", "Special figure stop symbol display state", "First grand prize opening state before opening", "First grand prize opening control state", and "First grand prize opening state" ``Closed effective state'', ``First grand prize opening opening end wait state'', ``Second grand prize opening pre-opening state'', ``Second grand prize opening control state'', and ``Second grand prize opening closed state''. "Valid state" and "Second big prize opening opening end wait state" are defined.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the "11" special game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores special game control modules (programs) corresponding to each special game phase as special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first moves to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, special game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, special game control module execution processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special pattern fluctuation waiting state", a special pattern fluctuation waiting process to be described later is started, and the "special pattern fluctuation state" is started. If the value corresponds to , the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "first major winning opening pre-opening state", the first major winning opening pre-opening process to be described later is started, and the value corresponds to the "first major winning opening opening control state". In this case, the first big winning opening opening control process described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening closing valid state", the first big winning opening closing valid process described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "1st big winning hole opening end wait state", the 1st big winning hole opening end wait process described later is started, and it corresponds to the "2nd big winning hole opening state". If the value corresponds to the "Second Grand Prize Port Opening Control State", the second major prize opening preprocessing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "Second Grand Prize Port Opening Control State", the second major prize opening opening described later is started. When the control process is started and the value corresponds to the "second big winning hole closing valid state", the second big winning hole closing valid process described later is started, and the "second big winning hole opening end wait state" is started. ”, a second major winning opening opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure change waiting process)
Next, the special figure fluctuation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation waiting process.
When the special figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process moves to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (No) The process moves to step S11-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes), the process moves to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) Then, the process moves to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (No), the process moves to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, a special figure reservation number update process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-4. In the special figure reservation number update process, the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure reservation number update process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more.
Then, when the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more, a value (in this embodiment, "1") that specifies the game based on the special figure 2 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. At the same time as setting, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not ``1'' or more (the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is ``0''), the special figure 1 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. A value (in this embodiment, "0") specifying a game based on is set, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter.
As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is given priority over the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area, Start determination is performed.

In step S11-4, a command setting process for specifying the number of reservations is executed, and the process moves to step S11-5. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a special figure reserved number designation command that specifies that the number of reserved special figures has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", a special symbol reservation number designation command that specifies that the special symbol 2 reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. do.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a special symbol reservation number designation command specifying that the special symbol 1 reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S11-5, special symbol storage area shift processing is executed, and the process moves to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area where game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-6, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-7. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired. Next, it is determined whether the acquired setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6").
If it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than a predetermined setting comparison value (or more than a predetermined setting comparison value), the value of the gaming machine status flag area (gaming machine status flag) in the RAM 230 is set to an abnormal setting state. Save the corresponding value. Furthermore, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of a setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process moves to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process moves to the next process (step S11-7).

In step S11-7, a special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-8. In the special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special pattern hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, a special figure jackpot determination process is executed.
In the special figure jackpot determination process, first, the value (set value) set in the set value area is confirmed, and the special figure jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read special pattern jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" (special symbol lottery). Figure jackpot judgment).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special symbol jackpot lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is It is determined that it is a “big hit” (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special map jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won. do.
If it is determined by the special figure jackpot determination process that the "big hit" has not been won, a special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, based on the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read out special pattern small winning lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small hit" or not. (Special figure small hit determination).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 matches the small winning value registered in the special pattern small winning lottery table, the special symbol lottery is The result is determined to be a "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 does not match the small win value registered in the special map small win lottery table, the "small hit" has been won. It is determined that there is no.
When it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won by the special figure small hit determination process, a special figure time saving determination process is executed.
In the special figure time-saving determination process, the special figure time-saving lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, based on the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read special symbol time-saving lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving" or not. (Special figure time saving judgment).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 matches the time-saving value registered in the special symbol time-saving lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is It is judged as “time saving” (winner).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 does not match the time-saving value registered in the special figure time-saving lottery table, it is determined that the "time-saving" has not been won. do.
If it is determined by the special symbol time saving determination process that "time saving" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "lost".

In step S11-8, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-9. In the special pattern determination process, the type of the stop pattern of the special pattern is determined (special pattern determination).
Specifically, in the special pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be a "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as a "jackpot" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the type of "jackpot symbol" is determined.
For this purpose, the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read jackpot symbol lottery table.
At this time, as described above, if the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 1 game information, either "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 2 game information, either the "jackpot symbol 3" or the "jackpot symbol 4" is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by the special pattern winning determination, the type of the "small winning symbol" is determined.
For this purpose, the small winning symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
At this time, either "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "time-saving symbol" (winning) by the special symbol winning determination, the type of "time-saving symbol" is determined.
For this, the time-saving symbol lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is read out. Then, the type of time-saving symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out time-saving symbol lottery table.
At this time, one of the "time saving symbols 1" to "time saving symbols 3" is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "miss" (lost) by the special pattern hit determination, a "miss symbol" is determined as the type of the stopped symbol.
Next, symbol information specifying the determined type of stopped symbol is set (stored) in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-9, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, a special symbol type designation command that designates the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, a special figure stop symbol number determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-11. In the special figure stop symbol number determination process, the stop symbol number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the stop symbol number (seg data) is registered.
In addition, as stop symbol number lottery tables, there is a jackpot stop symbol number lottery table that corresponds to "jackpot", a small hit stop symbol number lottery table that corresponds to "small hit", and a short time stop that corresponds to "time save". A symbol number lottery table and a symbol number lottery table that stops at the time of failure corresponding to a "miss" are stored.
In addition, as a jackpot stop symbol number lottery table, there is a jackpot stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and a jackpot symbol number lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information). A stop symbol number lottery table is stored.
In the special figure stop symbol number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined that it is a "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is confirmed, and the jackpot stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read out jackpot stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the symbol number lottery table that stops at the time of a small hit is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read out small win stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "time saving" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the time saving time stop symbol number lottery table is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read time saving stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a "miss" (lost) by the special symbol hit determination, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of defeat is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read out stopping symbol number lottery table upon failure.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-11, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-12. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed. If the result of the special figure win determination is a failure (“miss”), a special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of failure, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a win (“big hit,” “small win,” or “time saver”), a winning special symbol variation mode determination process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the losing special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type of reach group random number ("undefined value" or "fixed value") included in the game information stored in storage area 0 is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 is less than "8500", it is determined as "undefined value", and if it is greater than "8500", it is determined as " Fixed value.
In the special figure fluctuation mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined (reach group determination).
In reach group determination, when "fixed value" is determined by random number type determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed value" is read. On the other hand, when "undefined value" is determined by the random number type determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to "undefined value" is read. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of loss).
In the failure time fluctuation mode determination, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination, the hold type (type of gaming information stored in storage area 0), and the number of holds (gaming information stored in storage area 0) are used. The number of reservations corresponding to the type of game) and the current gaming state ("normal state", "time saving state 1" or "time saving state 2") are checked, and the failure fluctuation mode is determined according to the confirmation result. Read the table.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read out fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss are determined. Determine the table and.
In the special figure fluctuation mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of loss).
In the rejection variation pattern determination, first, the rejection variation pattern determination table determined by the rejection variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read out variation pattern determination table at the time of losing.

In the special symbol variation mode determination process at the time of winning, first, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variable mode determination, first, the reservation type (type of game information stored in storage area 0), the current gaming state ("normal state", "time saving state 1" or "time saving state 2"), The type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination is confirmed, and the winning time variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the winning variation pattern are determined. Determine the table and.
In the special symbol variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the winning variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read.
Then, a variable pattern number (type of variable pattern) is determined based on the variable pattern random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 and the read winning variable pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, a variable pattern command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-13. In the variation pattern command setting process, a special figure variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S11-14. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for variable display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-11 is obtained. Then, the obtained variable time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, special figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S11-15. In the special figure variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is controlled to light up.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is controlled to light up.

In step S11-15, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-16, a customer waiting setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demo designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special figure fluctuation processing)
Next, the special figure fluctuation processing executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation processing.
When the special figure fluctuation processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process moves to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S12-8.
In step S12-2, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S12-3. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-3, special figure stop display data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S12-4. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the obtained stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the obtained stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-4, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S12-5. In the stop designation command setting process, the special figure stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information confirmation number counter.
In step S12-5, the number of times cut management process is executed, and the process moves to step S12-6. The number-of-times management process will be described later.
In step S12-6, play time management processing is executed, and the process moves to step S12-7. In the play time management process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the play time counter.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the play time counter has been subtracted from "1" to "0". If it is determined that the value of the play time counter has been subtracted from "1" to "0", "1" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and "1" is set as the value of the second time saving counter. ” is set, and a value corresponding to the time saving state 1 (“1” in this embodiment) is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, time saving control 1 is started. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the play time counter has not been subtracted from "1" to "0", the process moves to the next process (step S12-7).
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S12-8, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 9, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-9, special figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-14). In the special figure variation display data update process, data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter.

(Number of times cut management processing)
Next, the number-of-times cutting management process executed in step S12-5 will be explained.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the number-of-times management process.
When the number-of-times management process is executed in step S12-5, as shown in FIG. 23, the process first moves to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not the time-saving control (time-saving control 1 or time-saving control 2) is in progress, and if it is determined that the time-saving control is in progress (Yes), the process moves to step S28-2. If it is determined that the time saving control is not in progress (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S12-6).
Here, if the value set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1" (value corresponding to time-saving state 1) or "2" (value corresponding to time-saving state 2), time-saving control is in progress. If the value set in the time saving control flag area is "0" (a value corresponding to the normal state), it is determined that the time saving control is not in progress.
In step S28-2, a second time saving counter update process is executed, and the process moves to step S28-3. In the second time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter.
In step S28-3, it is determined whether the value of the second time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time saving end condition 2" is satisfied), and the value of the second time saving counter is determined. is updated from "1" to "0"("time saving end condition 2" is satisfied) (Yes), the process moves to step S28-7, and the value of the second time saving counter is "1". ” has not been updated to “0” (“time saving end condition 2” is not satisfied) (No), the process moves to step S28-4.

In step S28-4, it is determined whether or not to start the variable display of the second special symbol, and if it is determined to start the variable display of the second special symbol (Yes), the process moves to step S28-5, If it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be started (the variable display of the first special symbol is to be started) (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S12-6). do. In this embodiment, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", it is determined to start the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the second special symbol It is determined not to start displaying fluctuations in .
In step S28-5, a first time saving counter update process is executed, and the process moves to step S28-6. In the first time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter.
In step S28-6, it is determined whether the value of the first time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time saving end condition 1" is satisfied), and the value of the first time saving counter is determined. is updated from "1" to "0"("time saving end condition 1" is satisfied) (Yes), the process moves to step S28-7, and the value of the first time saving counter is "1". ” has not been updated to “0” (“Time-saving termination condition 1” is not satisfied) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6). Transition.
In step S28-7, time saving control stop processing is executed, and the process moves to step S28-8. In the time saving control stop process, a value corresponding to the normal state (in this embodiment, "0") is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Moreover, "0" is set as the value of each time-saving counter (first time-saving counter and second time-saving counter). As a result, time saving control is stopped.
In step S28-8, a sub-command setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S12-6). In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in the gaming state (stopping of time saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special figure suspension processing)
Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure stopping process.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first moves to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped symbol is a "jackpot symbol". If it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is a "jackpot symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3. If it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not a "jackpot symbol" (No), the procedure advances to step S13-8.
In step S13-3, a gaming state update process is executed, and the process moves to step S13-4. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set as the value of the play time counter.
In the game state update process, next, a value corresponding to time saving state 1 (in this embodiment, "1") or a value corresponding to time saving state 2 (in this embodiment, "1") is stored in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. 2) is set.
If it is determined that "1" or "2" is set in the time saving control flag area, the value corresponding to the normal state is set as the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second time saving counter). (in this embodiment, "0") and also sets "0" in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is stopped.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" or "2" is not set in the time saving control flag area ("0" is set), the process moves to the next process.
In step S13-4, special electric role control data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-5. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling opening and closing of the special electric accessory 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special power control table corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol". Each second special electric role control table corresponds to the opening time, the effective time for closing the big winning hole, the closing time for the big winning hole, the ending time, the number of rounds (the number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of times the opening/closing switching is performed, the control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching, etc. are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read second special electric role control table is stored in the special electric role of the RAM 230. Set in the electric control table area.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-5, opening time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the second special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, opening designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command that designates the type of "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the second grand prize opening is opened" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped symbol is a "small winning symbol", and if it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is a "small winning symbol" (Yes), step S13- If it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not a "small winning symbol" (No), the procedure advances to step S13-13.
In step S13-9, special electric role control data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-10. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling opening and closing of the special electric accessory 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first special electric combination control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". Each first special electric role control table includes the opening time, the effective time for closing the big winning opening, the closing time for the big winning opening, the ending time, the number of rounds (the number of small winning games), and each round (small winning game). The number of opening/closing switches corresponding to the opening/closing switching, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching, and the V-area solenoid 66 corresponding to each round (small winning game). Control data (solenoid control data, control time data), etc. are defined.
In the special electric win control data setting process, the first special electric win control table corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read first special electric win control table is stored in the RAM 230. Set in the special power control table area.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-10, opening time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-11, opening designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S13-12. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command that designates the type of "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the first big prize opening is opened" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-13, it is determined whether the type of the stopped symbol is a "time saving symbol", and if it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is a "time saving symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-14. If it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not a "time-saving symbol" (it is a "missing symbol") (No), the procedure advances to step S13-16.
In step S13-14, a gaming state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S43-3. In the game state setting process, a game state is set.
Specifically, in the gaming state setting process, first, the current gaming state is confirmed.
Then, when the current gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state is started. At this time, if the type of the stop symbol is "Time-saving symbol 1", the value of the first time-saving counter is set to "100", the value of the second time-saving counter is set to "105", and the RAM 230 is Set "2" in the time saving control flag area. As a result, time saving control 2 is started. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is "time saving symbol 2", the value of the first time saving counter is set to "1000", the value of the second time saving counter is set to "1000", and the time saving symbol of the RAM 230 is set to "1000". Set "1" in the control flag area. As a result, time saving control 1 is started. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is "time saving symbol 3", the value of the first time saving counter is set to "100", the value of the second time saving counter is set to "100", and the time saving of the RAM 230 is set to "100". Set "1" in the control flag area. As a result, time saving control 1 is started.
On the other hand, if the current gaming state is a time-saving state (time-saving state 1 or time-saving state 2), the current time-saving state (the current value of the first time-saving counter, the current value of the second time-saving counter, and the current time-saving state) The value of the control flag area) is maintained and the process moves to the next process (step S13-15).
In step S13-15, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special symbol fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-16, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special symbol fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing before opening the first grand prize opening)
Next, the first grand prize opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening pre-opening process.
When the first big prize opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, the process first moves to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation count update process is executed, and the process moves to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, a round start designation command that designates the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role opening/closing switching frequency setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S14-5. In the special electric function opening/closing switching count setting process, the first special electric function control table set in the special electric function control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching frequency corresponding to the value of the special electric function continuous operation counter is determined. Read out. Then, the read-out switching frequency is set in the special electric switching switching frequency counter. Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric prize winning number counter.
In step S14-5, special electric role opening/closing switching processing is executed, and the process moves to step S14-6. The special electric role opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(First prize opening control process)
Next, the first big prize opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening control process.
When the first big prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process moves to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process moves to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, special electric role opening/closing switching processing is executed, and the process moves to step S16-4. The special electric role opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and the value of the special electric prize winning number counter reaches a predetermined upper limit. If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached (Yes), the process moves to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric prize winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit (No) Then, the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, a big prize opening control end process is executed, and the process moves to step S16-6. In the grand prize opening control termination process, solenoid control data specifying energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S16-6, a big prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S16-7. In the big winning opening closing valid time setting process, a predetermined big winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is specified by referring to the first special electric win control table set in the special electric win control table area of the RAM 230. Set to game timer.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command that designates the end of the round (small winning game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening closing valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(1st grand prize opening closure effective processing)
Next, the first grand prize opening closing validating process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first big winning opening closing validating process.
When the first big prize opening closing validating process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the process moves to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process moves to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special power continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process moves to step S17-9.
Here, with reference to the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of rounds specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and the judgment is made. conduct.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether or not the value set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "1". If (Yes), the process moves to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "0" (No), the process moves to step S17-11.

In step S17-4, a gaming state update process is executed, and the process moves to step S17-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set as the value of the play time counter.
In the gaming state update process, next, it is determined whether "1" or "2" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
If it is determined that "1" or "2" is set in the time saving control flag area, a predetermined initial value (this implementation In addition, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, time saving control is stopped.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" or "2" is not set in the time saving control flag area ("0" is set), the process moves to the next process (step S17-5).

In step S17-5, special electric role control data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-6. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling opening and closing of the special electric accessory 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric combination control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". Each second special electric role control table corresponds to the opening time, the effective time for closing the big winning hole, the closing time for the big winning hole, the ending time, the number of rounds (the number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of times the opening/closing switching is performed, control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) for the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching, etc. are defined.
In the special electric win control data setting process, the second special electric win control table (for jackpot) corresponding to the type of "small hit symbol" determined in step S11-5 is read out, and the read second special electric win control table (for jackpot) is set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S17-6, opening time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the second special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-7, opening designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command that designates the start of a jackpot gaming state is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the second grand prize opening is opened" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-9, a big prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S17-10. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first special electric winning combination control table set in the special electric winning opening control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the first big prize opening is opened" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-11, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, the first special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-12, ending designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S17-13. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command that designates the end of the small winning game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first big prize opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(1st big prize opening end wait processing)
Next, the first big prize opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening opening end wait process.
When the first big prize opening opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first moves to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S18-3. In the V non-winning designation command setting process, the V non-winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special symbol fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(2nd grand prize opening pre-opening process)
Next, the second grand prize opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening pre-opening process.
When the second big prize opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process moves to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, a special electric role continuous operation count updating process is executed, and the process moves to step S40-3. In the special electric role continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter.
In step S40-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S40-4. In the round start designation command setting process, a round start designation command that designates the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a special electric role opening/closing switching count setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S40-5. In the special electric function opening/closing switching count setting process, the second special electric function control table set in the special electric function control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching frequency corresponding to the value of the special electric function continuous operation counter is determined. Read out. Then, the number of switching times that has been read out is set in the special power switching switching number counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric prize winning number counter.
In step S40-5, special electric role opening/closing switching processing is executed, and the process moves to step S40-6. The special electric role opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second big prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second prize opening control process)
Next, the second big prize opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening control process.
When the second big prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process moves to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S41-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process moves to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, special electric role opening/closing switching processing is executed, and the process moves to step S41-4. The special electric role opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 8 [balls]), and the value of the special electric prize winning number counter If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached (Yes), the process moves to step S41-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric award winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit (No) Then, the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, a big prize opening control end process is executed, and the process moves to step S41-6. In the grand prize opening control termination process, solenoid control data specifying energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the second special electric accessory 55a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S41-6, a big prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S41-7. In the big winning opening closing valid time setting process, the predetermined big winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is specified by referring to the second special electric win control table set in the special electric win control table area of the RAM 230. Set to game timer.
In step S41-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S41-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command that designates the end of the round game is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second big prize opening closing valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second grand prize opening closure effective processing)
Next, the second grand prize opening closing validating process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening closing effective process.
When the second big prize opening closing validating process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process moves to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process moves to step S42-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special power continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process moves to step S42-6.
Here, with reference to the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value and determined. I do.

In step S42-3, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the second special power win control table set in the special power win control table area of the RAM 230. Further, a predetermined number of play times (in this embodiment, 600 [times]) is set as the value of the play time counter.
In step S42-4, ending designation command setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S42-5. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command that designates the end of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second big prize opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-6, a big prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S42-7. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the second special electric winning combination control table set in the special electric winning opening control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the second grand prize opening is opened" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Second grand prize opening end wait processing)
Next, the second grand prize opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be explained.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening opening end wait process.
When the second big prize opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process moves to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, a gaming state setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S43-3. In the game state setting process, a game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, first, the type of the stopped symbol ("jackpot symbol" or "small prize symbol") is confirmed.
If the "jackpot symbol 1" is won, "1" is set as the value of the first time-saving counter, "5" is set as the value of the second time-saving counter, and the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set. Set "2". As a result, time saving control 2 is started.
On the other hand, if you win "Jackpot symbol 2" to "Jackpot symbol 4", "Small winning symbol 1" or "Small winning symbol 2", "100" is set as the value of the first time saving counter, and the second time saving counter is set to "100". The counter value is set to "105" and the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "2". As a result, time saving control 2 is started.
In the gaming state setting process, next, "0" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S43-3, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special symbol fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special electric opening/closing switching process)
Next, the special electric role opening/closing switching processing in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3 will be explained.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special electric role opening/closing switching process.
When the special power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, the process first moves to step S15-1, as shown in FIG. 33.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S14-6 , S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, special electric role control data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S15-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 55a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role opening/closing is performed by referring to the first special electric role control table or the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Read the solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the switching number counter. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or de-energization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, control of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 is started based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S15-3, special electric role control time setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S15-4. In the special power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special power control time setting process, the special power control opening/closing is performed by referring to the first special power control table or the second special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230. Read the control time corresponding to the value of the switching number counter. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric role opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4). . In the special electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter.

(Normal game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be explained.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, as a phase/stage (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase") of a game executed based on the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game"), "waiting for normal symbol fluctuation""State","Public figure fluctuating state", "Public figure stopped symbol display state", "Public figure electrical accessory opening state", "Public figure electric accessory opening control state", "Public figure electric accessory closing effective" Seven states are defined: ``state'' and ``common electric accessories release end wait state''.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module (program) corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
In the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 34, the process first moves to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process moves to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, processing based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", a general pattern fluctuation waiting process to be described later is started, and the process corresponds to the "normal pattern fluctuation state". If it is a value, the process during normal pattern fluctuation will be started, which will be described later.If the value corresponds to the ``normal pattern stopped symbol display state'', the process during normal pattern fluctuation, which will be described later, will be started, If the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory release control state", the normal electric accessory release pre-processing described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory release control state", the normal electric accessory release control processing described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory closing valid state", the normal electric accessory closing valid processing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening end wait state" , a normal electric accessory opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Public figure fluctuation waiting process)
Next, the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process.
When the ordinary figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first moves to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general figure reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes), , the process moves to step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure reservation counter is not greater than "1" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). do.

In step S20-2, a process for updating the number of reserved general drawings is executed, and the process moves to step S20-3. In the general map reservation number update process, the general map reservation number is updated.
Specifically, in the process of updating the number of reserved ordinary figures, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the ordinary figure reserved number counter.
Next, the storage area where the general game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the storage contents of storage area 1 of the standard game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the standard game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the standard game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the standard game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the standard game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the standard game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the standard game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the standard game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
Next, a command for specifying the number of reserved ordinary figures that specifies that the number of reserved ordinary figures has been decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S20-3, a normal pattern win/loss determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-4. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (common symbol winning/losing determination).
The ROM 220 stores a regular symbol winning/losing lottery table in which the winning values of the regular symbol lottery are registered. In addition, as a winning/losing drawing table for ordinary drawings, there is a drawing table for winning/losing ordinary drawings that corresponds to when the time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is being executed, and a drawing table that corresponds to the winning/losing drawing table that corresponds to when the time saving control (hour saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is stopped. A winning/losing lottery table for ordinary figures is stored.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning is the same (in this embodiment, 1/1) for the winning/losing drawing table corresponding to the winning/losing drawing table while the time saving control is stopped and the drawing table corresponding to winning/losing drawings corresponding to the winning/losing drawing table while the time saving control is being executed. The winning value is registered as follows.
In the winning/losing determination process for winning/losing coins, a winning random number included in the gaming information stored in storage area 0 and a winning/losing lottery table for coins corresponding to the current execution status of the time saving control (in progress or stopped), Based on this, the winning/losing determination of the normal pattern is executed.
Specifically, if the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in storage area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be a "normal symbol winning" (winning). do.
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be a "miss" (lost).

In step S20-4, a normal pattern stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-5. In the normal pattern stop pattern determination process, the type (stop pattern number) of the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern stop pattern determination).
In the normal pattern determination process, when it is determined as a "normal pattern hit" (winning) by the normal pattern win/loss determination, the type of the "normal pattern hit pattern" is determined (normal pattern pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a pattern random number per normal pattern and a pattern lottery table per normal pattern in which the correspondence between the type of "symbol per normal pattern" is registered. And, in the pattern lottery table per normal pattern, ``design 1 per normal pattern'' and ``design 2 per normal pattern'' are registered as the types of ``symbols per normal pattern''.
Then, in the ordinary symbol determination process, the type of symbol per ordinary symbol (stop symbol number).
On the other hand, if it is determined as a "lost" (lost) by the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol, a "losing symbol" is determined as the type of the stopped symbol (stopped symbol number).
Next, the determined type of stopped symbol (stopped symbol number) is stored in the stopped symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, a common symbol type designation command that specifies the determined type of stopped symbol (stopped symbol number) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-5, a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (common pattern variation pattern determination). Next, a general figure fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the determined fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-6, a normal figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-7. In the ordinary figure fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the obtained variable time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a general figure fluctuation display data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S20-8. In the ordinary figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the ordinary figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the ordinary figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the ordinary figure display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the ordinary figure display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the ordinary figure display device, the lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the ordinary figure display symbol counter is performed.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the general map display device. As a result, the lighting of the segment corresponding to the set segment data among the predetermined number of segments constituting the general map display device is controlled.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuating state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during general figure fluctuation)
Next, the normal pattern fluctuation process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern fluctuation process.
When the ordinary figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first moves to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S21-2. However, if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process moves to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the general figure display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 3, and if it is determined that the value of the general figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, a normal pattern fluctuation display data update process is executed, and the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the ordinary figure fluctuation display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the ordinary figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, ordinary figure stop display data setting processing is executed, and the process moves to step S21-5. In the ordinary figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the ordinary figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stopped symbol number stored in the stopped symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the obtained stop symbol number is set as the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the ordinary figure display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the ordinary figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (displayed in a stopped state).
Next, the general pattern stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S21-5, a normal figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal pattern stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during general map suspension)
Next, the general map stop process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the normal map stop processing.
When the general map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 37, the process first moves to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stopped symbol is a "symbol per common symbol", and if it is determined that the stopped symbol is not a "symbol per common symbol" (No), the process moves to step S22-3. However, if it is determined that the stopped symbol is a "normal symbol" (Yes), the process moves to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S22-4, a normal electric utility control data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S22-5. In the normal electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores the game state (“normal state”, “time saving state 1” or “time saving state 2”), “symbol per normal pattern” (“symbol per normal pattern 1” or “symbol per normal pattern 2”). A normal electric power control table corresponding to the combination of , is stored. Each normal power control table contains the time before normal power opening, normal power closing effective time, open end wait time, number of open/close switches, and control data (solenoid control data, control time) corresponding to each open/close switch. data) etc. are specified.
In particular, in the normal electric role control table that is selected when "1 symbol per ordinary symbol" is won based on the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state (time saving control flag area = "0"), A "short opening pattern" is designated as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the per-figure game state.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table that is selected when "symbol 2 per normal pattern" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state (time saving control flag area = "0"), A "short opening pattern" is designated as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the per-figure game state.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table that is selected when "symbol 1 per normal symbol" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time saving state 1 (time saving control flag area = "1"), A "short release pattern" is designated as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal figure winning game state.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table that is selected when "symbol 2 per normal symbol" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time saving state 1 (time saving control flag area = "1"), A "short release pattern" is designated as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal figure winning game state.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table that is selected when "symbol 1 per normal symbol" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time saving state 2 (time saving control flag area = "2"), A "long opening pattern" is designated as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the ordinary figure winning game state.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table that is selected when "symbol 2 per normal symbol" is won based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time saving state 2 (time saving control flag area = "2"), A "long opening pattern" is designated as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the ordinary figure winning game state.
In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, the current gaming state (value set in the time saving control flag area) and the "symbol per ordinary symbol"("symbol per ordinary symbol 1" or "symbol per ordinary symbol 2") The normal power function control table corresponding to the combination of and is read out, and the read normal power function control table is set in the normal power function control table area of the RAM 230.
Next, with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230, the number of opening/closing switching is read out. Then, the read-out switching frequency is set in the normal power switching switching frequency counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the number of ordinary winnings counter.

In step S22-5, a normal power role release pre-release time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S22-6. In the normal power role pre-release time setting process, the normal power role control table set in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined normal power role pre-release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory pre-release state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory release pre-processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory release preprocessing executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing.
When the normal electric accessory release preprocessing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 38, the process first moves to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process moves to step S23-3. The normal power opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory opening control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal power opening/closing switching process)
Next, the normal power opening/closing switching processing in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be explained.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the normal electric role opening/closing switching process.
When the normal power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first moves to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric role opening/closing switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S23-3 Or move on to S25-4).
In step S24-2, a normal electric utility control data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S24-3. In the normal electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal power control data setting process, the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal power opening/closing switching counter is set. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or de-energization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal power control time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S24-4. In the normal power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal power control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal power opening/closing switching counter is performed by referring to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Read out the time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, a normal electric switch opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, and the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter is newly set in the normal electric role opening/closing switching frequency counter.

(Normal electric accessory release control process)
Next, the normal electric accessory release control process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory release control process.
When the normal electric accessory release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first moves to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process moves to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching number counter is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric role opening/closing switching number counter is not "0" (No) The process moves to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal power opening/closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process moves to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, a normal power opening/closing switching process (see FIG. 38) is executed, and the process moves to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electricity prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and the value of the ordinary electricity winning prize number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process moves to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric award winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Then, the series of processes is completed and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, normal power release control termination processing is executed, and the process moves to step S25-6. In the normal power release control termination process, solenoid control data specifying energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal power closure effective time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S25-7. In the normal power role closing valid time setting process, the normal power role closing valid time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power role control table set in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closing valid state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Ordinary electric accessory closure effective processing)
Next, the ordinary electrically powered accessory closure validating process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory closure validating process.
When the normal electric accessory closure validating process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first moves to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, an open end wait time setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S26-3. In the release end wait time setting process, a predetermined release end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power role control table set in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be explained.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory opening end wait process.
When the normal electric accessory release end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first moves to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process moves to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be explained.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process moves to step S38-1, as shown in FIG. 43.
In step S38-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Further, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved to the save area of the RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process moves to step S38-3, and the game If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process moves to step S38-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not a game enabled state has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to a game-enabled state, it is determined that a game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to a game-enabled state, the game It is determined that the possible state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, total out counter addition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether the on state of the out switch 109 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 is not detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not the game is in a predetermined game state. If it is determined that the game is in a predetermined game state (Yes), the process moves to step S38-5, and it is determined that the game is not in a predetermined game state. If so (No), the process moves to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined gaming state" is a gaming state in which the time saving control (time saving control 1 and time saving control 2) is stopped and the jackpot gaming state is not occurring.
In step S38-5, normal out counter addition processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether the on state of the out switch 109 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the out counter is not normally added.

In step S38-6, a normal prize ball counter addition process is executed, and the process moves to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected. When it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is equal to the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 51. Add "4". On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 has been detected. When it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the second starting port 52. Add "2". On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the right winning port switch 105 has been detected. Then, when it is determined that the on state of the right winning hole switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added to "4" which is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the right winning hole 56. ” is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state of the right winning a prize opening switch 105 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the left winning port switch 106 has been detected. When it is determined that the on state of the left winning hole switch 106 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the other left winning holes 57a to 57c. Add "4". On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8 If it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process moves to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value=60000×n (n=integer). Note that "n" is a value indicating the current section, and "1" is set as the initial value.
In step S38-8, section update processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 of RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to base value buffer 2 of RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal out counter. Further, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. This updates the reference value.
In step S38-9, base ratio calculation processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal prize ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process moves to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which base ratio is to be displayed is selected from among the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section.
Then, when displaying the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , set the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and set the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 to The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "b" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the letter "b" is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and the current value is displayed by LED49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the one digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

On the other hand, if you select to display the base ratio of the previous section, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , set the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in base value buffer 2 to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and set the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in base value buffer 2 to the base ratio stored in base value buffer 2. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letter "b" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the letter "c" is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and the current value is displayed by LED49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the one digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In step S38-11, register restoration processing is executed, and the process moves to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the value of the register saved in step S38-1 are The saved stack pointer value (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) is restored.
In step S38-12, interrupt permission processing is executed, the series of processing ends, and the process moves to the next processing (step S4-26). In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. This allows execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various changes can be made to the embodiments described above.
For example, in the above embodiment, it is only possible to set the normal state (waking state) in response to power-on (specifically, execution of RAM clear initialization processing (step S1-30)). First, during the progress of the game, the normal state (morning state) is activated in response to the total number of special symbol fluctuations (specifically, the number of times the first special symbol is fluctuated) reaching a predetermined number of play times. It becomes possible to set.
However, in response to turning on the power (specifically, executing the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30)), it becomes possible not only to set the normal state (morning state), but also to advance the game. Among them, a configuration may be adopted in which a normal state (morning state) can be set in response to winning a "small win".
The configuration of a pachinko machine 2 (not shown) according to a modification will be described below. Note that the basic configuration of the pachinko machine 2 is similar to the basic configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, in the following description, the description of the configuration of the pachinko machine 2 that is similar to that of the pachinko machine 1 will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing winning probabilities of various lottery games according to a modified example. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the winning types of the special symbol lottery according to the modification.
In the pachinko machine 2, "big hit", "small hit", "time saving", and "miss" are defined as the results of the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" are defined as the results of the second special symbol lottery.
As shown in Figure 44(b), in the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the "big hit" is 1/300, the probability of winning the "small hit" is 1/100, and the probability of winning the "time saving" is 1/100. The probability is 1/50. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44(b), in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the "big hit" is 1/300, and the probability of winning the "small win" is 1/100.
As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the pachinko machine 2, "jackpot symbol 1" is selected as the winning type (type of "jackpot symbol") when a "jackpot" is won in the first special symbol lottery. , "Jackpot symbol 2" are defined. In the first special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if a "jackpot" is won, the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 1" is 1/2, and the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 2" is 1/2. 2.
As shown in FIG. 45(b), in the pachinko machine 2, the winning type (type of "small winning symbol") selected when a "small winning" is won in the first special symbol lottery is "small winning symbol". Only ``3'' is specified. In the first special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if the "small win" is won, the probability of winning the "small win symbol 3" is 100/100.
As shown in FIG. 45(c), in the pachinko machine 2, "time saving symbol 1" is selected as the winning type ("time saving symbol" type) selected when "time saving" is won in the first special symbol lottery. , "Time-saving symbol 2" and "Time-saving symbol 3" are defined. In the first special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if "time saver" is won, the probability of winning "time saver symbol 1" is 20/100, and the probability of winning "time saver symbol 2" is 30/100. 100, the probability of winning "Time-saving symbol 3" is 50/100.
As shown in FIG. 45(d), in the pachinko machine 2, "jackpot symbol 3" is selected as the winning type (type of "jackpot symbol") when a "jackpot" is won in the second special symbol lottery. , "Jackpot symbol 4" are defined. In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if you win the "jackpot", the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 3" is 50/100, and the probability of winning "jackpot symbol 4" is 50/100. It is 100.
As shown in FIG. 45(e), in the pachinko machine 2, the "small win symbol" is selected as the winning type ("small win symbol" type) selected when a "small win" is won in the second special symbol lottery. 1" and "Small winning symbol 2" are defined. In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), if a "small win" is won, the probability of winning "small win symbol 1" is 50/100, and the probability of winning "small win symbol 2" is 50/100. , 50/100.

When "Jackpot Symbol 1" to "Jackpot Symbol 4" are won, a jackpot game state occurs. At this time, if the "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times]. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times]. On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 4 [times].
At the end of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of time reductions (first number of time reductions, second number of time reductions, third number of time reductions) is set. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, time saving control (time saving control 1 or time saving control 2) is started according to the set time saving number of times. As a result, the time saving state (time saving state 1 or time saving state 2) is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In particular, in this modification, in addition to the above-mentioned "time saving ending conditions 1" to "time saving ending conditions 3", a "time saving ending condition 4" is defined as the time saving ending conditions.
"Time-saving termination condition 4" is a condition based on winning a "small win" (small win game state) in a special symbol lottery (special symbol win/loss determination). In other words, the time saving termination condition 4 is a condition based on the number of times a "small win" is won. In this embodiment, the time saving end condition 4 is satisfied when the number of winning times of time saving medium and small wins reaches the third time saving number of times (prescribed number of times) set at the end of the jackpot game state.
"Number of time-saving small and medium winnings" is the number of times "small winning" was won by special symbol lottery executed (started) during time saving control ("small winning" was determined by special symbol winning judgment carried out during time saving control) (number of times).
When the time saving end condition 4 is satisfied, the time saving control is ended at the end of the variable display of the special symbol that triggered the time saving end condition 4 to be satisfied.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a third time-saving counter that counts the number of winnings for the time-saving small and medium prizes. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets a third time saving number according to the winning type (type of winning symbol) as the value of the third time saving counter. In addition, each time a "small hit" is determined by the start determination (special map hit determination) based on the special figure game information (in this embodiment, the special figure 2 game information), "1" is added from the value of the third time saving counter. Subtract. Then, in response to the value of the third time saving counter being subtracted from "1" to "0", time saving end condition 4 is satisfied and time saving control is stopped. As a result, the number of times a "small hit" is determined by the start determination (special figure hit determination) based on the special figure game information (in this embodiment, the special figure 1 game information) executed during the time-saving control is determined as the jackpot game. When the third time saving number of times (prescribed number of times) set at the end of the state is reached, the time saving end condition 4 is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 45(a) or (d), if the "jackpot symbol 1" is won, at the end of the jackpot game state, 1 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 1 [times] is set as the second time saving number. , 5 [times] are set, and 0 [times] is set as the third time saving number. Then, time saving control 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the first time saving end condition (first time saving number = 1 [times]) and the second time saving ending condition (second time saving number = 5 [times]) are set as the time saving ending condition, and the jackpot game The game state after the end of the state becomes time saving state 2. In this case, 0 [times] is set as the third time saving number of times, and the third time saving end condition is not set as the time saving end condition.
On the other hand, if you win "Jackpot Symbol 2", "Jackpot Symbol 3", or "Jackpot Symbol 4", at the end of the jackpot game state, 100 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 100 [times] is set as the second time saving number. , 105 [times] are set, and 0 [times] is set as the third time saving number. Then, time saving control 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the first time saving end condition (first time saving number = 100 [times]) and the second time saving ending condition (second time saving number = 105 [times]) are set as the time saving ending condition, and the jackpot game The gaming state after the end of the state becomes time saving state 2. In this case, 0 [times] is set as the third time saving number of times, and the third time saving end condition is not set as the time saving end condition.

When "small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 3" are won, a small winning game state is generated. At this time, if "small winning symbol 1" to "small winning symbol 3" are won, the number of small winning games is set to 1 [times].
Here, in this modification, the type of "small winning symbol" is a type that makes it easy (possible) to cause the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "small winning symbol"). (hereinafter referred to as "small hit (with V)") and the type in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of a small winning gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "small hit (without V)"). ) is stipulated.
If you win a "small hit (with V)", in each small win game, the distribution means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state.
On the other hand, if you win a "small win (no V)", in each small win game, it will be difficult (impossible) for the game ball that entered the big winning hole 55 to pass through the V area, The distributing means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state.
In this modification, "small win symbol 1" and "small win symbol 2" are "small win (with V)", and "small win symbol 3" is "small win (without V)". has been done. As a result, when the "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state. On the other hand, if the "small winning symbol 3" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state.

When passing through the V area by a game ball is detected during the occurrence of a small winning game state (when passing through the V area by a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 55 during execution of a small winning game) In this case, a jackpot gaming state is generated in response to the end of the small winning gaming state.
At this time, if "Small winning symbol 3" is won and passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the number of round games is set to 1 [times]. . As a result, two rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game. In addition, if you win "Small winning symbol 3", as mentioned above, it will be difficult for the game ball to pass through the V area while the small winning gaming state is occurring, so in principle, following the small winning gaming state, Therefore, a jackpot gaming state is not generated.
On the other hand, if the "small winning symbol 1" is won and passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the number of round games is set to 9 [times]. As a result, 10 rounds will be executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
On the other hand, if the "small winning symbol 2" is won and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, the number of round games is set to 3 [times]. As a result, four rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.

As shown in FIG. 45(e), when the "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state. At the end of the jackpot game state, 100 [times] is set as the first time saving number, 105 [times] is set as the second time saving number, and 0 [times] is set as the third time saving number. Ru. Then, time saving control 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the first time saving end condition (first time saving number = 100 [times]) and the second time saving ending condition (second time saving number = 105 [times]) are set as the time saving ending condition, and the jackpot game The game state after the end of the state becomes time saving state 2. In this case, 0 [times] is set as the third time saving number of times, and the third time saving end condition is not set as the time saving end condition.
In addition, if you win "Small winning symbol 3", as mentioned above, it will be difficult for the game ball to pass through the V area while the small winning gaming state is occurring, so in principle, following the small winning gaming state, Therefore, a jackpot game state is not generated, and accordingly, a new time saving state is not provided.

"Time-saving symbols 1" to "time-saving symbols 3" are game states (specifically, jackpot game states) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the variable ball entrance (specifically, the jackpot opening 55). (or a small winning game state) is a winning symbol that does not give a winning symbol. That is, even if "Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Time Saving Symbol 3" are won, the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entrance (specifically, the special electric accessory 55a) is not executed with the winning as a trigger.
If you win "Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Time Saving Symbol 3" based on the start determination executed during the normal state, the time saving state (Time Saving State 1 or Time Saving State 2) will be triggered by the winning. will be started.
On the other hand, if you win "Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Time Saving Symbol 3" based on the start determination executed while the Time Saving State (Time Saving State 1 or Time Saving State 2) is occurring, the Time Saving Symbol 1 to "Time Saving Symbol 3" is won, The time-saving state 1 or the time-saving state 2) is continued, and a new time-saving state (the time-saving state 1 or the time-saving state 2) is not started in response to the winning. In other words, if you win "Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Time Saving Symbol 3" based on the start determination executed while the Time Saving State (Time Saving State 1 or Time Saving State 2) is occurring, the number of Time Saving Symbols at the time of said winning. (1st number of time reductions, 2nd number of time reductions, 3rd number of time reductions) will continue, and with the said winning as an opportunity, new number of time reductions (1st number of time reductions, 2nd number of time reductions, 3rd number of time reductions) will not be set.

As shown in FIG. 45(c), if the "time saving symbol 1" is won based on the start determination performed during the normal state, 100 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and the second The number of time reductions is set to 105 [times], and the third number of time reductions is set to 0 [times]. Then, time saving control 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the first time saving end condition (first time saving number = 100 [times]) and the second time saving ending condition (second time saving number = 105 [times]) are set as the time saving ending condition, and the jackpot game The game state after the end of the state becomes time saving state 2. In this case, 0 [times] is set as the third time saving number of times, and the third time saving end condition is not set as the time saving end condition.
On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 2" is won based on the start determination performed during the normal state, 1000 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 1000 [times] as the second time saving number. is set, and 1 [times] is set as the third time saving number. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, time saving control 1 is started. As a result, the time saving end conditions are the first time saving ending condition (first time saving number = 1000 [times]), the second time saving ending condition (second time saving number = 1000 [times]), and the third time saving ending condition ( The third time saving number of times = 1 [times]) is set, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the time saving state 1.
On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 3" is won based on the start determination performed during the normal state, 1000 [times] is set as the first time saving number, and 1000 [times] as the second time saving number. is set, and 3 [times] is set as the third time saving number. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, time saving control 1 is started. As a result, the time saving end conditions are the first time saving ending condition (first time saving number = 1000 [times]), the second time saving ending condition (second time saving number = 1000 [times]), and the third time saving ending condition ( The third time saving number of times = 3 [times]) is set, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the time saving state 1.
On the other hand, if "time saving symbol 1" to "time saving symbol 3" are won based on the start determination executed while the time saving state (time saving state 1 or time saving state 2) is occurring, the time saving state will continue (new (The number of time saving times will not be overwritten.)

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 2 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 2, when a "jackpot" is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the game ball into the jackpot 55 is caused.
Furthermore, when a "small win" is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win game state is generated in which it is possible (easily) to enter the game ball into the large winning hole 55. Furthermore, when the passage of the V area by the game ball that entered the big winning hole 55 is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state, it becomes possible (easily) for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 55. A jackpot gaming condition is generated.
Then, by letting the game ball enter the big winning hole 55, the player can win many prize balls.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 2, the probability that a jackpot gaming state will occur based on the second special symbol drawing is higher than the probability that a jackpot gaming state will occur based on the first special symbol drawing. .
Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, since a "small win (with V)" is not set as a lottery result, a jackpot game state is generated only when a "big win" is won. The probability of winning a "jackpot" in the first special symbol lottery is 1/300 (probability according to the set value).
On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit" and "small win (with V)" are set as the lottery results, so if a "big hit" is won, a jackpot gaming state will occur, and " When a small win (with V) is won and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected while the small win game state is occurring, the jackpot game state is generated. In particular, the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small hit (with V)" in the second special symbol lottery is 4/300.
In this way, in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot gaming state can be generated via the small winning gaming state, so the probability that the jackpot gaming state will occur is lower than that in the first special symbol lottery. It's getting expensive.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 2, there is a higher possibility that a jackpot gaming state will occur when the second special symbol lottery opportunity is obtained than when the first special symbol lottery opportunity is acquired, and the player It will be advantageous.

In order to obtain the opportunity for the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to win the "general symbol" in the ordinary symbol lottery, and to keep the ordinary electric accessory 52a in the open state while the ordinary symbol gaming state is occurring. Sometimes, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52.
Here, in the pachinko machine 2, a "short opening pattern" and a "long opening pattern" are defined as opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state. When the "short release pattern" is selected, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state. On the other hand, when the "long open pattern" is selected, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the normal pattern winning game state.
In particular, during the occurrence of the normal state, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, during the normal state, if you win a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery, there is a 1/1 probability that it will be difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 (second (difficult to obtain special symbol lottery opportunities).
On the other hand, while the time saving state 1 is occurring, if a "normal symbol hit" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, while the time saving state 1 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, there is a probability of 1/1 that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 (the first 2) It is difficult to obtain the opportunity to draw special symbols.
On the other hand, while time saving state 2 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, while the time saving state 2 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 with a probability of 1/1. 2) It is easy to get the opportunity to draw special symbols.

In this manner, while the normal state or time saving state 1 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "short opening pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, even if you win a "normal symbol" in the regular symbol lottery, it is virtually impossible to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game with the aim of acquiring an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery in order to shift the gaming state to the time saving state 2. That is, the game proceeds by launching the game ball toward the left path with the aim of the game ball entering the first starting port 51.
At this time, while the normal state is occurring, if "time saving symbol 1", "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the gaming state can be shifted to time saving state 2. On the other hand, while the time saving state 1 is occurring, if the "jackpot symbol 1" or "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the gaming state can be shifted to the time saving state 2. As a result, when the normal state is occurring, the probability of transitioning to the time saving state 2, which is the most advantageous gaming state to the player, is higher than when the time saving state 1 is occurring, which is advantageous to the player. .
On the other hand, while time saving state 2 is occurring, if a "normal symbol" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1. As a result, if you win a "normal symbol" in the normal symbol lottery, it becomes easy to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in order to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery, the player will proceed with the game with the aim of winning the "long open pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery. That is, the game proceeds by launching the game ball to the right path with the aim of passing the game ball through the starting gate 41.

In the pachinko machine 2, when a RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30), which will be described later, is executed, a normal state is generated. Here, as described above, the normal state has a higher probability of shifting to the time saving state 2, which is the gaming state most advantageous to the player, compared to the time saving state 1, and is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the normal state is a so-called "morning state."
While the normal state or time saving state 1 is occurring, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed and the game progresses.
Then, if you win the "jackpot symbol 1" based on the first special symbol lottery, the first number of time savings = 1 [times], the second number of time savings = 5 [times], and the third number of time savings = 0 [times] is set, and the time saving state 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, if you win the "jackpot symbol 2" based on the first special symbol lottery, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is: 1st time saving number = 100 [times], 2nd time saving number = 105 [times] times] is set, the third time saving number = 0 [times], and time saving state 2 is started.
In addition, if the "time saving symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first time saving number = 100 [times], the second time saving number = 105 [times] is set, the third time saving number = 0 [times] is set, and the time saving state 2 is started in response to the stop display of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first time saving number = 1000 [times], the second time saving number = 1000 [times] is set, the third time saving number = 1 [times] is set, and the time saving state 1 is started in response to the stop display of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the "time saving symbol 3" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first time saving number = 1000 [times], the second time saving number = 1000 [times] is set, the third time saving number = 3 [times] is set, and the time saving state 1 is started in response to the stop display of the special symbol.
In addition, if you win "time saving symbol 1" to "time saving symbol 3" based on the first special symbol lottery executed while time saving state 1 is occurring, a new time saving state (first time saving number/second The current time saving state 1 (the first number of working hours and the second number of working hours) is continued. For example, when the "time saving symbol 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed while the time saving state 1 is occurring, the time saving state 1 is continued and there is no transition to the time saving state 2.
On the other hand, while the time saving state 2 is occurring, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed and the game is progressed.
Then, when "Jackpot symbol 3" or "Jackpot symbol 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, the first time saving number = 100 [times] and the second time saving number = 105 [times] are set. , the third time saving number = 0 [times] is set, and the time saving state 2 is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, if "small winning symbol 1" or "small winning symbol 2" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state. , the first time saving number = 100 [times], the second time saving number = 105 [times], the third time saving number = 0 [times], and in response to the end of the jackpot game state, time saving state 2 is started.

With the above configuration, in the pachinko machine 2, when the "time saving symbol 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the third time saving number = 1 [times] (the third The time saving end condition) is set, and the time saving state 1 is started in response to the stop display of the special symbol. As a result, in response to the number of times the "small hit (no V)" was won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, reaching 1 [times], the time saving state 1 will be reduced. State 1 is ended and a normal state (waking state) is started.
Similarly, if the "time saving symbol 3" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the third time saving number = 3 [times] (third time saving end condition) is set. , time saving state 1 is started in response to the stop display of the special symbol. As a result, in response to the number of times the "small hit (no V)" was won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state 1, reaching 3 [times], the time saving state 1 will be reduced. State 1 is ended and a normal state (waking state) is started.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 2, it is only possible to set the normal state (morning state) in response to power-on (specifically, execution of the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30)). Instead, it is possible to set a normal state (morning state) in response to winning a "small win (no V)" while the game is in progress. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 2, it is possible to improve the gameplay.
Here, on the display screen 31a, in response to the start of time saving state 1, a suggestion image (" A configuration may also be adopted in which an image of a meter or the like indicating the remaining number of winnings of "Small win (no V)" starts to be displayed. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the remaining number of "small wins (no V)" required until the normal state (morning state) starts based on the display of the suggestion image. , it becomes possible to further improve the gameplay.

(Modification 2)
In addition, in the above embodiment and modification 1, in the normal state (morning state), it is possible to shift to the time saving state 2 upon winning the "time saving symbol 1", so compared to the time saving state 1, the player It is advantageous for
However, the number of time reductions (first time reduction number, second time reduction number) that would be awarded in the event that a predetermined "jackpot symbol" is won in the special symbol lottery executed during time reduction state 1 is higher than the number of time reduction times (first time reduction number, second time reduction number) Due to the fact that the number of time reductions (first time reduction number, second time reduction number) awarded when a predetermined "jackpot symbol" is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of time reduction state 1 A configuration may be adopted in which the normal state (morning state) is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (morning state).
In addition, if a predetermined "jackpot symbol" is won by a special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state 1, the predetermined premium image will not be displayed during the jackpot gaming state, and the normal state (morning state) will not be displayed. If a predetermined "jackpot symbol" is won by a special symbol lottery executed during occurrence, a predetermined premium image is displayed during occurrence of the jackpot game state, so that the normal state (morning state) is more effective than time saving state 1. A configuration may be adopted in which this is more advantageous to the player.
For example, if "Jackpot symbol 1" is won by a special symbol lottery executed during the normal state (morning state), the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot gaming state is 1st time reduction number = 1000 times, The second time saving number is set to 1005 times (after the end of the jackpot game state=time saving state 2). In addition, if "Jackpot symbol 2" is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state (morning state), the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot gaming state is 1st time reduction number = 1000 times, The second time saving number is set to 1005 times (after the end of the jackpot game state=time saving state 2). If "Jackpot Symbol 1" is won in a special symbol lottery executed during the normal state (morning state), the special symbol related to the special symbol lottery is displayed in fluctuation, or during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. , the configuration is such that a premiere image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 1" is won by the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state 1, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game state is as follows: 1st time reduction number = 1 time, 2nd time reduction number = 1 time, 2nd time reduction number = 1 time The number of times is set to 5 (after the end of the jackpot game state = time saving state 2). In addition, if you win "Jackpot symbol 2" in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state 1, the number of time savings given after the end of the jackpot game state is 1st time saving number = 100 times, 2nd time saving number = 100 times, 2nd time saving number = 100 times The number of times is set to 105 (after the end of the jackpot game state = time saving state 2). If the "jackpot symbol 1" is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state 1, the premium will be paid during the fluctuation display of the special symbol related to the special symbol lottery or during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. The configuration is such that no image is displayed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in the above embodiment or modification 1, a common effect is executed during the normal state (morning state) and during the time saving state 1 (the background image and the effect pattern displayed on the display screen 31a). z1, z2, the preview effects that appear, the BGM output from the speaker 22, the light emission pattern of the board lamp 21, etc. are made common or similar), so that the current gaming state can be changed to the normal state (morning state). ) or time saving state 1 may be difficult to distinguish. This makes it possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing during the time-saving state 1.
In addition, in the above embodiment or modification 1, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the normal state (morning state) and the time-saving state 1, while the time-saving state 1 is occurring, even though the time-saving state is in the time-saving state, the time-saving state It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the external signal indicating that the time saving state is occurring is not outputted (while the time saving state 2 is occurring, an external signal indicating that the time saving state is occurring is outputted).

(Modification 4)
In addition, in the above embodiment or modification 1, when the "time saving symbol 2" or "time saving symbol 3" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state (morning state), the display screen 31a , an image indicating the end of the morning state may be displayed. For example, if "time saving symbol 2" or "time saving symbol 3" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state (morning state), the special symbol will be displayed a predetermined number of times thereafter. During the period when the wake-up mode is activated, an image including the words "Wake-up mode is not activated!" may be displayed to indicate the end of the wake-up mode.
On the other hand, when the power is restored while the time-saving state 1 is occurring, an image suggesting that the wake-up state is not occurring (for example, an image containing the words "Wake-up not operating!") is not displayed on the display screen 31a. By doing so, it may be made difficult to distinguish between the normal state (morning state) and the time saving state 1 again.

(Effects of pachinko machines 1 and 2)
The pachinko machines 1 and 2 operate in any one of a plurality of gaming states, including a normal state, a time-saving state 1, and a time-saving state 2, which is advantageous to the player compared to the normal state and the time-saving state 1, respectively. It is equipped with a main control board 200 that can set the gaming state. Further, when the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30) is executed, the normal state is set. Moreover, when the "time saving symbol 1" is determined by the start determination, the opening/closing operation of the special electric accessory 55a is not executed. Then, when the "time saving symbol 1" is determined by the start determination executed during the setting of the normal state, the time saving state 2 is set. On the other hand, when the "time saving symbol 1" is determined by the start determination executed during the setting of the time saving state 1, the time saving state 2 is not set. Furthermore, the game is progressed by firing the game ball into a common area (the entire or part of the left path) during the setting of the normal state and during the setting of the time saving state 1. Here, the "common area" may be the entire area of the left path or a part of the left path (for example, the game ball launched in response to the rotational operation of the firing handle 6 is A predetermined area located on the left side of the exit of a guideway (launching path) for guiding the target to the target, a predetermined area located on the left side of the first starting port 51, etc.).
That is, in the pachinko machines 1 and 2, when the "time-saving symbol 1" is determined by the start determination executed during the setting of the normal state, the time-saving state 2, which is advantageous to the player, is set. On the other hand, when the "time saving symbol 1" is determined by the start determination executed during the setting of the time saving state 1, the time saving state 2, which is advantageous to the player, is not set. As a result, during the setting of the normal state, it becomes possible to shift to the time-saving state 3 upon winning the "time-saving symbol 1" in which the opening/closing operation of the special electric accessory 55a is not executed, and compared to the time-saving state 1, the game It will be advantageous for the person.
In particular, in the pachinko machines 1 and 2, the normal state is set in accordance with the execution of the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30). As a result, in accordance with the execution of the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30), it is possible to shift to the time-saving state 2 upon winning the "time-saving symbol 1" in which the opening/closing operation of the special electric accessory 55a is not performed. It becomes possible to set a gaming state (specifically, a normal state).
As described above, in the pachinko machines 1 and 2, it is possible to improve the gameplay.
In addition, in the pachinko machines 1 and 2, the game is progressed by firing game balls in different paths when the normal state or time saving state 1 is set and when the time saving state 2 is set. Further, the base ratio is the same or substantially the same during the setting of the normal state and during the setting of the time saving state 1.
As a result, in the pachinko machines 1 and 2, while the gaming experience during the normal state and the gaming experience during the time saving state 1 are the same, the player is more comfortable in the normal state than in the time saving state 1. It becomes possible to make it advantageous.

1 Pachinko machine 41 Starting gate 51 1st starting port 52 2nd starting port 55 Big prize opening 200 Main control board 300 Production control board

Claims (1)

a game determination means for executing game determination;
Any one of a plurality of gaming states including a first state, a second state, and a third state that is advantageous to the player compared to the first state and the second state, respectively. configurable game state control means;
When initialization processing is executed, the first state is set,
When a specific result is determined by the game determination, the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entrance is not performed,
The types of the identification results include a first identification result and a second identification result,
If the first specific result is determined by the game determination performed during the setting of the first state, the third state is set;
The first state is set in response to the number of times of the game determination executed during the setting of the third state reaching a first predetermined number of times,
If the second specific result is determined by the game determination performed during the setting of the first state, the second state is set;
The first state is set in response to the number of times of the game determination executed during the setting of the second state reaching a second predetermined number of times,
If the first specific result is determined by the game determination performed during the setting of the second state, the third state is not set;
The game is progressed by firing game balls into a common area during the setting of the first state and the setting of the second state,
The game is progressed by firing game balls into different areas during setting of the second state and setting of the third state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined number of times is greater than the first predetermined number of times.

Images